Asme Secc Xi

XI
ASME BOILER AND PRESSURE VESSEL CODE
A N I N T E R N AT I O N A L C O D E
RULES FOR
INSERVICE
INSPECTION OF
NUCLEAR POWER
PLANT COMPONENTS
2000 Addenda
July 1, 2000
ASME BOILER AND

PRESSURE VESSEL
COMMITTEE
SUBCOMMITTEE
ON NUCLEAR
INSERVICE
THE AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS INSPECTION
NEW YORK, NEW YORK
Q011W0
ASME B&PVC SEC11$ADFM 05-15-00 13:30:36 pd: frontmatter Rev 15.04

IMPORTANT INFORMATION
ON THE 1998 BOILER AND
PRESSURE VESSEL CODE ADDENDA
DISTRIBUTION SCHEDULE
There is a change in the way the Addenda to the 1998 Edition of the ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code are distributed. The 1998 Edition, published July 1, 1998, incorpo-
rates the 1998 Addenda revisions, additions, or deletions. There will be no separate 1998
Addenda issued in a replacement page format. Two additional Addenda to the 1998
Edition, in the form of replacement pages, will be issued on July 1, 1999 and July 1, 2000.
The Summary of Changes published with the 1998 Edition lists and describes the revisions
that are part of the 1998 Addenda. These changes are identified with a margin note, 98,
denoting the affected area.
The Addenda for 1999 and 2000 will also have a Summary of Changes and identifiers
printed on the replacement pages. The revisions, additions, or deletions will be incorporated
directly into the affected pages. It is advisable to retain the title sheets and all replaced
pages for reference.
The effective dates for Code Editions and Addenda are described in the Foreword.
No part of this document may be reproduced in any form,

in an electronic retrieval system or otherwise,
without the prior written permission of the publisher.
The American Society of Mechanical Engineers

Three Park Avenue, New York, NY 10016-5990
Copyright © 2000 by
THE AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS
All Rights Reserved
Printed in U.S.A.
ASME B&PVC SEC11$ADFM 05-15-00 13:30:36 pd: frontmatter Rev 15.04

SUMMARY OF CHANGES
Addenda to the 1998 Edition of the Code are issued in the form of replacement pages. Revisions,
additions, or deletions are incorporated directly into the affected pages. It is advisable, however,
that all replaced pages be retained for reference.
Replace or insert the pages listed. Changes given below are identified on the pages by a
margin note, A00, placed next to the affected area. Revisions to the 1998 Edition are indicated
by 98 and revisions in the 1999 Addenda are indicated by A99. For the listing below, the
Page references the affected area. A margin note (A00) placed next to the heading indicates
Location. Revisions are listed under Change.
Page Location Change
v Contents Updated to reflect A00

xi–xx Roster Updated to reflect A00
xxi Preface to Section XI (1) Third paragraph, “Inservice Testing of
Pump and Valves,” added
(2) Under “Owner Responsibilities,” subpara-
graph (c) revised
(3) Under “Duties of the Authorized Nuclear
Insurance Inspector,” subparagraphs (a)
and (c) revised
xxiii Organization of Section XI Under 2., “Subsection,” IWP and IWV deleted
from Division 1 listing
3–8 Subsection IWA Contents Updated to reflect A00
11 IWA-1100 First sentence revised
13 Table IWA-1600-1 Eighth, tenth, and eleventh entries deleted
14 IWA-2110 (1) Subparagraph (a)(5) deleted
(2) Subparagraphs (a)(6)–(a)(9) redesignated
(a)(5)–(a)(8) respectively
15 IWA-2210 First paragraph corrected by errata
16.1 IWA-2234 Added
20–21 IWA-2420 Subparagraphs (b)(2) and (b)(3) revised
IWA-2430 (1) Subparagraph (f) deleted
(2) Subparagraphs (g)–(j) redesignated (f)–(i) re-
spectively
36 IWA-4131.2 Subparagraph (d) revised
IWA-4132 (1) Footnote (6) added
(2) Subparagraph (h) revised
37 IWA-4150 Subparagraphs (c)(3)(a) and (c)(3)(b) corrected
by errata
38–40 IWA-4160 Revised
IWA-4180 Subparagraph (b)(8) revised
WA-4221 Subparagraphs (a) and (c) revised
IWA-4222 Footnote (7) added to subparagraph (a)(2)
IWA-4224.2 Subparagraph (c) revised
IWA-4224.3 Subparagraph (b) revised
41 IWA-4340 Added by errata
ASME B&PVC SEC11$$COS 05-31-00 11:39:56 pd: soc Rev 15.04

42 IWA-4421 Subparagraphs (b) and (c) revised

43, 43.1 IWA-4451.1 Subparagraphs (a)–(c) corrected by errata
45–48 IWA-4530 (1) Footnote (8) added to title
(2) Subparagraphs (b) and (c) deleted
(3) Subparagraph (d) redesignated as subpara-
graph (b)
IWA-4540 Subparagraph (b)(10) revised
IWA-4610 (1) Subparagraph (b)(1)(b) redesignated as sub-
paragraph (b)(1)(d)
(2) New subparagraphs (b)(1)(b) and (b)(1)(c)
added
IWA-4622 Revised
64 IWA-4664 Revised
65 IWA-4666.1 Subparagraph (d) revised
74 IWA-5120 Subparagraph (d) revised
IWA-5211 (1) Subparagraphs (a) and (b) revised
(2) Footnote (1) deleted
IWA-5212 Subparagraph (b) revised in its entirety
75 IWA-5221 Revised
77, 77.1 IWA-5400 Deleted by errata
80, 82, 83 Glossary (1) The following terms deleted:
(a) inservice test
(b) operational readiness
(2) Definition of test revised
93 IWB-2420 Subparagraph (b) revised
101 Table IWB-2500-1, Exami- Under “Examination Method,” third entry re-
nation Category B-G-1 vised
106 Table IWB-2500-1, Exami- Under “Examination Method,” first entry re-
nation Category B-L-1 vised
107 Table IWB-2500-1, Exami- Subtitle corrected by errata
nation Category BN-1
126 Figure IWB-2500-12 Revised
130 Figure IWB-2500-16 Revised
136 IWB-3134 Subparagraph (b) corrected by errata
158 IWB-5221 Subparagraph (a) revised
Table IWB-5230-1 Note (1) revised
167 IWC-2420 Last sentence in subparagraph (b) added
177 Table IWC-2500-1 Note (1) revised
196 Table IWC-3510-1 Note (4) corrected by errata
200 IWC-5221 Revised in its entirety
212 IWD-5221 Revised in its entirety
215, 216 Subsection IWE Contents Updated to reflect A00
217, 218 IWE-1220 Subparagraph (c) revised
IWE-1231 Subparagraph (b) revised

IWE-1232 Subparagraph (c) added

219 IWE-2310 Subparagraph (a) revised in its entirety
220 IWE-2330 Subparagraph (b) revised in its entirety
229 Article IWE-4000 Deleted
231 Article IWE-7000 Deleted
239 IWF-2500 Footnote (1) added to subparagraph (a)
252 IWL-2521 Subparagraph (a) corrected by errata
253 Table IWL-2500-1, Exami- Under “Test or Examination Method,” second
nation Category L-A entry corrected by errata
258 IWL-4110 Subparagraph (c) added
261–264 Subsection IWP Deleted
265–268 Subsection IWV Deleted
299 Article III-1100 Subparagraph (a) corrected by errata
372 Mandatory Appendix VIII, Subparagraph 1.1(c), last sentence revised
Supplement 8
405 A-3310 Nomenclature for Eq. (2) revised
406 A-3320 (1) First paragraph added
(2) Footnote (2) moved to first paragraph
(3) Equation (6) revised
(4) Subparagraph (b) revised
(5) Equation (7) added
(6) Nomenclature for Eq. 7 revised
(7) Former Eq. (7) redesignated as Eq. (8)
418 A-5200 (1) Penultimate sentence in first paragraph re-
vised
(2) After fifth paragraph, new material added
462 G-2110(a) Equation corrected by errata
464, 466, 467 G-2215 Last sentence corrected by errata
499 Article J-1000 Subparagraph (b) revised
500 Figure J-1000-1 Corrected by errata
502 Article J-3000 Revised in its entirety
507, 508 K-1300 (1) A, Ac, ᐉ, PI, Rm, ␴o, ␴u added to nomen-
clature
(2) Definition for ␴y revised
519, 520 K-5300 New material added to subparagraph (b)

[Blank SOC Page] This is electronic page #6 [Blank SOC Page]
CONTENTS A00
A Detailed Contents Precedes Each Subsection and the Appendices
Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
Statements of Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Preface to Section XI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi
Organization of Section XI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiii
SI Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvii
Summary of Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxi
Division 1 Rules for Inspection and Testing of Components of Light-Water

Cooled Plants
Subsection IWA General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Subsection IWB Requirements for Class 1 Components of Light-Water Cooled Power
Plants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Subsection IWC Requirements for Class 2 Components of Light-Water Cooled Power
Plants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Subsection IWD Requirements for Class 3 Components of Light-Water Cooled Power
Plants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Subsection IWE Requirements for Class MC and Metallic Liners of Class CC
Components of Light-Water Cooled Power Plants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Subsection IWF Requirements for Class 1, 2, 3, and MC Component Supports of
Light-Water Cooled Power Plants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Subsection IWL Requirements for Class CC Concrete Components of Light-Water
Cooled Power Plants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Appendices Mandatory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Nonmandatory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Division 2 Rules for Inspection and Testing of Components of Gas-Cooled Plants

Foreword ................................................................. 533
Division 3 Rules for Inspection and Testing of Components of

Liquid-Metal Cooled Plants
Foreword ................................................................. 535
Subsection IMA General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Subsection IMB Requirements for Class 1 Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
ASME B&PVC SEC11$$$FM 05-15-00 15:41:33 pd: frontmatter Rev 15.04

Subsection IMC Requirements for Class 2 Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
Subsection IMD Requirements for Class 3 Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663
Subsection IME Requirements for Class MC and Metallic Liners of Class CC Components
of Liquid-Metal Cooled Plants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675
Subsection IMF Requirements for Class 1, 2, and 3 Component Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699
Subsection IMV Inservice Testing of Valves in Nuclear Power Plants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
Appendices Mandatory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727
Nonmandatory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 783
vi

[This is electronic SEC11$$TOC page #6
PERSONNEL A99
A00
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee
Subcommittees, Subgroups, and Working Groups
As of January 1, 2000
MAIN COMMITTEE CONFERENCE COMMITTEE
D. E. Tanner — Tennessee D. J. Jenkins — Kansas
D. A. Canonico, Chair W. M. Lundy
(Chair) M. Kotb — Quebec, Canada
G. G. Karcher, Vice Chair J. R. MacKay
R. D. Reetz — North Dakota J. P. Larson — Minnesota
J. S. Brzuszkiewicz, Secretary T. G. McCarty
(Vice Chair) K. T. Lau — Alberta, Canada
R. W. Barnes G. C. Millman
A. J. Justin — Ohio (Secretary) J. Lemire — California
F. P. Barton R. A. Moen
R. J. Aben, Jr. — Michigan W. C. Lundine — Oregon
D. L. Berger P. A. Molvie
J. S. Aclaro — Los Angeles, S. E. Lyons — Arkansas
M. D. Bernstein C. C. Neely
California M. A. Malek — Florida
M. N. Bressler T. P. Pastor
E. A. Anderson — Chicago, Il- G. F. Mankel — Alaska
P. J. Conlisk C. J. Pieper
linois I. W. Mault — Manitoba,
R. E. Feigel R. F. Reedy
J. Anderson — South Dakota Canada
J. G. Feldstein B. W. Roberts
R. Barkdoll — Washington H. T. McEwen — Mississippi
R. E. Gimple F. J. Schaaf, Jr.
R. Barlett — Arizona A. W. Meiring — Indiana
M. Gold A. Selz
F. P. Barton — Virginia R. Mile — Ontario, Canada
O. F. Hedden K. K. Tam
M. Bishop — British Columbia, T. J. Monroe — Oklahoma
A. J. Justin D. E. Tanner
Canada M. F. Mooney — Massachu-
D. F. Landers
D. E. Burns — Nebraska setts
C. Castle — Nova Scotia, Y. Nagpaul — Hawaii
Canada J. D. Payton — Pennsylvania
EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE (MAIN COMMITTEE)
R. R. Cate — Louisiana D. K. Peetz — Missouri
G. G. Karcher, Chair M. Gold L. Chase — Northwest Territo- M. R. Peterson — Alaska
D. A. Canonico, Vice Chair O. F. Hedden ries, Canada D. C. Price — Yukon Territory,
J. S. Brzuszkiewicz, Secretary A. J. Justin R. A. Coomes — Kentucky Canada
J. G. Feldstein T. P. Pastor J. Corcoran — Connecticut R. S. Pucek — Wisconsin
M. H. Diehl, Jr. — Maryland C. D. Redmond — Michigan
D. A. Douin — Illinois T. E. Rennie — Arizona
HONORARY MEMBERS (MAIN COMMITTEE) D. Eastman — Newfoundland D. E. Ross — New Brunswick,
and Labrador, Canada Canada
R. D. Bonner E. J. Hemzy G. L. Ebeyer — New Orleans, M. Shuff — West Virginia
R. J. Bosnak E. C. Kistner, Jr. Louisiana N. Surtees — Saskatchewan,
H. M. Canavan J. E. Lattan E. Everett — Georgia Canada
L. J. Chockie J. LeCoff P. C. Hackford — Utah M. J. Verhagen — Wisconsin
J. S. Clarke F. N. Moschini D. H. Hanrath — North Car- R. B. West — Iowa
W. E. Cooper W. E. Somers olina M. J. Wheel — Vermont
W. D. Doty L. P. Zick, Jr. J. B. Harlan — Delaware R. K. White — New York
R. C. Griffin K. Hynes — Prince Edward T. F. Wickham — Rhode Island
Island, Canada C. S. Withers — Colorado
D. T. Jagger — Ohio
HONORS AND AWARDS COMMITTEE
SUBCOMMITTEE ON POWER BOILERS (SC I)
J. R. MacKay, Chair M. Gold
A. J. Spencer, Vice Chair F. E. Gregor J. R. MacKay, Chair W. L. Lowry
M. R. Argenziano, Secretary D. P. Jones M. D. Bernstein, Vice Chair T. C. McGough
F. P. Barton E. C. Kistner, Jr. P. D. Stumpf, Secretary R. E. McLaughlin
M. D. Bernstein T. P. Pastor D. L. Berger P. A. Molvie
J. G. Feldstein C. J. Pieper E. Everett D. K. Parrish
D. N. French J. T. Pillow
F. R. Gerety R. G. Presnak
MARINE CONFERENCE GROUP J. Hainsworth B. W. Roberts
T. E. Hansen R. D. Schueler, Jr.
J. Tiratto, Chair J. L. Jones J. S. Hunter R. V. Wielgoszinski
L. W. Douthwaite G. F. Wright C. F. Jeerings R. L. Williams
xi

[This is electronic file SEC11$pers page #11
Subgroup on Design (SC I) Subgroup on External Pressure (SC II)
M. D. Bernstein, Chair C. F. Jeerings R. W. Mikitka, Chair M. Katcher

R. D. Schueler, Jr., Vice Chair K. C. Morrison B. R. Morelock, Secretary E. Michalopoulos
P. A. Molvie, Secretary N. Surtees D. C. Agarwal D. Nadel
M. L. Coats R. V. Wielgoszinski D. J. Green C. E. Spaeder, Jr.
J. D. Fishburn D. S. Griffin C. H. Sturgeon
Subgroup on Ferrous Specifications (SC II)

Subgroup on Fabrication and Examination (SC I)
E. G. Nisbett, Chair W. C. Mack
D. L. Berger, Chair J. M. Lyons B. M. Dingman A. S. Melilli
R. E. McLaughlin, Secretary J. R. MacKay T. Graham J. T. Parsons
R. W. Boyce J. T. Pillow W. N. Holliday E. Upitis
D. N. French M. E. Reese D. A. Jackson R. Zawierucha
J. Hainsworth B. W. Roberts D. C. Krouse A. W. Zeuthen
T. E. Hansen R. D. Schueler, Jr. J. F. Longenecker R. H. Zong
M. H. Iken
Subgroup on International Material Specifications (SC II)
Subgroup on General Requirements (SC I) J. T. Parsons, Chair M. H. Iken

R. R. Seeley, Secretary W. M. Lundy
T. C. McGough, Chair C. F. Jeerings D. C. Agarwal H. Masahisa
M. D. Bernstein, Vice Chair J. M. Lyons J. Cameron F. Osweiller
W. L. Lowry, Secretary R. E. McLaughlin W. D. Doty R. D. Schueler, Jr.
D. L. Berger D. K. Parrish D. M. Fryer R. C. Soin
E. Everett J. T. Pillow J. P. Glaspie E. A. Steen
F. R. Gerety W. E. Somers M. Gold E. Upitis
J. Hainsworth R. L. Williams
Subgroup on Nonferrous Alloys (SC II)
Subgroup on Materials (SC I) D. W. Rahoi, Chair B. Heuer

D. C. Agarwal, Secretary G. C. Hsu
B. W. Roberts, Chair J. P. Libbrecht W. R. Apblett, Jr. M. Katcher
C. E. Spaeder, Jr., Chair F. Masuyama L. G. Coffee A. G. Kireta, Jr.
J. S. Hunter, Secretary J. M. Tanzosh A. Cohen E. Shapiro
D. N. French H. N. Titer, Jr. R. Dirscherl L. E. Shoemaker
J. F. Henry M. H. Gilkey R. C. Sutherlin
Subgroup on Strength, Ferrous Alloys (SC II)

Subgroup on Piping (SC I)
B. W. Roberts, Chair F. Masuyama
T. E. Hansen, Chair W. L. Lowry J. M. Tanzosh, Secretary R. A. Moen
D. L. Berger T. C. McGough W. R. Apblett, Jr. D. W. Rahoi
M. D. Bernstein R. G. Presnak M. Gold C. E. Spaeder, Jr.
P. D. Edwards E. Whittle J. J. Heger R. W. Swindeman
M. H. Iken C. L. Hoffmann B. E. Thurgood
Subgroup on Strength of Weldments (SC II & SC IX)

SUBCOMMITTEE ON MATERIALS (SC II)
C. E. Spaeder, Jr., Chair B. W. Roberts
M. Gold, Chair G. C. Hsu C. Robino, Secretary W. J. Sperko
R. A. Moen, Vice Chair F. Masuyama W. D. Doty J. M. Tanzosh
N. Lobo, Secretary R. K. Nanstad D. W. Rahoi
A. P. Ahrendt E. G. Nisbett
W. R. Apblett, Jr. J. T. Parsons
Subgroup on Toughness (SC II)
M. N. Bressler D. W. Rahoi
J. Cameron B. W. Roberts W. S. Jacobs, Chair J. L. Mooney
W. D. Doty E. Shapiro R. J. Basile C. C. Neely
D. W. Gandy C. E. Spaeder, Jr. J. Cameron T. T. Phillips
M. H. Gilkey R. W. Swindeman W. D. Doty M. D. Rana
J. J. Heger J. M. Tanzosh H. E. Gordon J. W. Stokes
J. F. Henry R. S. Vecchio G. B. Komora E. Upitis
C. L. Hoffmann K. Mokhtarian
xii

[This is electronic SEC11$pers page #12
SUBCOMMITTEE ON NUCLEAR POWER (SC III) Working Group on Component Supports (SG-D) (SC III)
C. J. Pieper, Chair D. H. Hanrath R. P. Deubler, Chair A. S. Laurenson

R. M. Jessee, Vice Chair R. S. Hill III R. M. Dulin, Jr., Secretary A. Lee
C. A. Sanna, Secretary C. L. Hoffmann U. S. Bandyopadhyay R. J. Masterson
Y. Asada K.-H. Hsu F. J. Birch A. N. Nguyen
R. W. Barnes C. C. Kim J. R. Cole I. Saito
W. H. Borter D. F. Landers J. C. Finneran, Jr. J. R. Stinson
E. B. Branch W. C. LaRochelle J. C. Hennart
M. N. Bressler W. N. McLean
F. C. Cherny R. A. Moen
G. D. Cooper D. B. Nickerson
R. P. Deubler R. F. Perrin Working Group on Core Support Structures (SG-D) (SC III)
W. D. Doty R. F. Reedy
F. R. Drahos B. B. Scott R. H. Hansen J. F. Mullooly
K. Ennis M. W. Smith K. B. Larsen B. L. Silverblatt
B. A. Erler J. D. Stevenson
G. M. Foster K. R. Wichman
Working Group on Dynamic and Extreme Load Conditions

(SG-D) (SC III)
Subgroup on Containment Systems for Spent Fuel
and High-Level Waste Transport Packagings (SC III)
D. L. Caldwell, Chair M. Hartzman
G. M. Foster, Chair T. J. Neider P. L. Anderson, Secretary W. S. LaPay
G. J. Solovey, Vice Chair R. E. Nickell M. K. Au-Yang H. Lockert
W. H. Borter D. J. Nolan R. D. Blevins A. E. Meligi
H. H. Chung D. T. Raske P.-Y. Chen P. R. Olson
J. T. Conner T. Saegusa A. Hadjian R. F. Perry
R. R. Doggart R. H. Smith
E. L. Farrow K. B. Sorenson
K. Goldmann J. D. Stevenson
Working Group on Piping (SG-D) (SC III)
D. R. Heath C. J. Temus
R. H. Jones P. Turula
R. S. Hill III, Chair K. A. Manoly
W. H. Lake N. Urabe
P. Hirschberg, Secretary J. C. Minichiello
H. W. Lee C. R. Witt
T. M. Adams S. E. Moore
P. McConnell S. Yukawa
G. A. Antaki A. N. Nguyen
J. R. Cole O. O. Oyamada
A. B. Glickstein R. D. Patel
Subgroup on Design (SC III) R. W. Haupt E. C. Rodabaugh
J. C. Hennart J. R. Santangelo
R. W. Barnes, Chair B. Jarman
R. D. Hookway M. S. Sills
E. B. Branch, Vice Chair R. I. Jetter
R. B. Jenkins G. C. Slagis
A. N. Nguyen, Secretary J. T. Land
D. F. Landers E. A. Wais
T. M. Adams D. F. Landers
Y. Asada W. N. McLean
M. N. Bressler J. C. Minichiello
C. W. Bruny D. B. Nickerson Working Group on Pumps (SG-D) (SC III)
J. R. Cole W. Z. Novak
G. D. Cooper E. C. Rodabaugh R. E. Cornman, Jr., Chair J. W. Leavitt
R. E. Cornman, Jr. I. Saito H. L. Brammer J. E. Livingston
R. P. Deubler J. R. Santangelo P. Burchett D. B. Nickerson
R. E. Gimple G. C. Slagis A. A. Fraser R. A. Schussler
D. H. Hanrath J. D. Stevenson M. Higuchi H. Tafarrodi
R. S. Hill III K. R. Wichman G. R. Jones G. K. Vaghasia
Working Group on Administration (SG-D) (SC III)

Working Group on Valves (SG-D) (SC III)
E. B. Branch, Chair D. F. Landers
R. W. Barnes, Vice Chair W. N. McLean W. N. McLean, Chair S. N. Shields
R. S. Hill III, Secretary D. B. Nickerson E. A. Bake H. R. Sonderegger
C. W. Bruny W. Z. Novak R. R. Brodin J. C. Tsacoyeanes
R. P. Deubler J. R. Santangelo R. Koester R. G. Visalli
J. T. Land J. D. Page
xiii

Working Group on Vessels (SG-D) (SC III) JOINT ACI-ASME COMMITTEE ON
CONCRETE COMPONENTS FOR NUCLEAR SERVICE (SC 3C)
C. W. Bruny, Chair K. A. Manoly
G. D. Cooper D. E. Matthews
B. B. Scott, Chair D. J. Haavik
G. A. Deaver A. Merend
M. F. Hessheimer, Vice Chair D. C. Jeng
D. H. Hanrath G. K. Miller
C. A. Sanna, Secretary T. E. Johnson
W. J. Heilker W. Z. Novak
J. P. Allen III N.-H. Lee
A. Kalnins E. Pelling
J. F. Artuso S. F. Putman
T. M. Khan H. S. Thornton
R. M. Attar R. E. Shewmaker
O. Maekawa
A. C. Eberhardt J. D. Stevenson
B. A. Erler A. Y. Wong
Special Working Group on Environmental Effects (SG-D) (SC III)
W. Z. Novak, Chair C. L. Hoffmann
Y. Asada R. A. Moen
SUBCOMMITTEE ON HEATING BOILERS (SC IV)
W. J. Heilker S. Yukawa
R. S. Hill III
F. P. Barton, Chair R. I. Mullican
P. A. Molvie, Vice Chair E. A. Nordstrom
Special Working Group on Seismic Piping Rules (SG-D) (SC III) M. R. Argenziano, Secretary J. L. Seigle
R. B. Duggan D. E. Tanner
E. B. Branch, Chair V. Matzen
W. L. Haag, Jr. S. V. Voorhees
T. M. Adams J. C. Minichiello
W. M. Hiddleston R. H. Weigel
G. A. Antaki M. S. Sills
J. D. Hoh R. V. Wielgoszinski
T. Isogai E. A. Wais
D. H. Mapes J. I. Woodworth
H. Kobayashi T. Yamazaki
K. M. McTague
Subgroup on General Requirements (SC III & SC 3C)

W. C. LaRochelle, Chair M. R. Minick
Subgroup on Care and Operation of Heating Boilers (SC IV)
K. Ennis, Secretary R. F. Perrin
A. Appleton B. B. Scott
B. H. Berg D. E. Tanner J. I. Woodworth, Chair P. A. Molvie
C. Lizotte D. M. Vickery M. R. Argenziano, Secretary R. I. Mullican
M. J. Meyer D. V. Walshe K. J. Hoey R. H. Weigel
R. Mile J. D. Hoh T. F. Wickham
K. M. McTague
Subgroup on Materials, Fabrication, and Examination (SC III)

C. L. Hoffmann, Chair R. M. Jessee
G. P. Milley, Secretary C. C. Kim Subgroup on Cast Iron Boilers (SC IV)
C. W. Allison R. A. Moen
B. H. Berg H. Murakami K. M. McTague, Chair T. F. Wickham
W. H. Borter C. J. Pieper R. B. Duggan J. I. Woodworth
D. Doyle N. M. Simpson R. H. Weigel
F. R. Drahos R. C. Soin
G. M. Foster W. J. Sperko
G. B. Georgiev K. B. Stuckey
J. E. Harris S. Yukawa Subgroup on Water Heaters (SC IV)
R. W. Jackson
W. L. Haag, Jr., Chair R. I. Mullican
T. D. Gantt D. Smith
Subgroup on Pressure Relief (SC III)
W. M. Hiddleston D. E. Tanner
F. C. Cherny, Chair M. W. Smith F. M. Lucas M. A. Taylor
S. F. Harrison, Jr. A. L. Szeglin K. M. McTague T. E. Trant
E. M. Petrosky B. S. York
Special Working Group on Editing and Review (SC III)

Subgroup on Welded Boilers (SC IV)
R. F. Reedy, Chair D. H. Hanrath
W. H. Borter W. C. LaRochelle P. A. Molvie, Chair J. L. Seigle
M. N. Bressler M. W. Smith T. L. Bedeaux R. P. Sullivan
R. P. Deubler J. D. Stevenson D. H. Mapes D. E. Tanner
B. A. Erler E. A. Nordstrom R. V. Wielgoszinski
xiv

SUBCOMMITTEE ON SUBCOMMITTEE ON PRESSURE VESSELS (SC VIII)
NONDESTRUCTIVE EXAMINATION (SC V)
T. P. Pastor, Chair J. C. Keenan
T. G. McCarty, Chair O. F. Hedden K. Mokhtarian, Vice Chair G. B. Komora
J. E. Batey, Vice Chair G. W. Hembree A. J. Roby, Secretary K. T. Lau
E. H. Maradiaga, Secretary F. B. Kovacs V. Bogosian R. W. Mikitka
S. J. Akrin R. W. Kruzic R. W. Boyce U. R. Miller
A. S. Birks J. F. Manning S. M. Caldwell C. C. Neely
B. H. Clark, Jr. W. C. McGaughey S. C. Cyr M. D. Rana
W. T. Clayton R. D. McGuire R. M. Elliott K. J. Schneider
R. A. Coomes F. J. Sattler J. R. Farr A. Selz
N. Y. Faransso E. F. Summers, Jr. R. E. Feigel J. R. Sims, Jr.
H. C. Graber J. G. Feldstein A. J. Spencer
G. L. Hollinger E. A. Steen
M. J. Houle K. K. Tam
Subgroup on General Requirements/ W. S. Jacobs E. L. Thomas, Jr.
Personnel Qualifications and Inquiries (SC V) G. G. Karcher
R. D. McGuire, Chair H. C. Graber

Subgroup on Design (SC VIII)
J. E. Batey G. W. Hembree
W. T. Clayton J. R. MacKay U. R. Miller, Chair G. B. Komora
N. Y. Faransso J. P. Swezy R. E. Knoblock, Secretary R. W. Mikitka
R. J. Basile K. Mokhtarian
M. R. Bauman T. P. Pastor
Subgroup on Surface Examination Methods (SC V) M. R. Breach M. D. Rana
S. M. Caldwell G. B. Rawls, Jr.
A. S. Birks, Chair H. C. Graber J. R. Farr C. D. Rodery
S. J. Akrin G. W. Hembree J. P. Glaspie A. Selz
T. Alexander R. W. Kruzic J. A. Hayward S. C. Shah
B. H. Clark, Jr. F. J. Sattler G. L. Hollinger J. W. Stokes
R. A. Coomes E. F. Summers, Jr. W. S. Jacobs K. K. Tam
G. G. Karcher E. L. Thomas, Jr.
Subgroup on Volumetric Methods (SC V)

Subgroup on Fabrication and Inspection (SC VIII)
J. E. Batey, Chair E. K. Kietzman
R. W. Boyce, Chair R. A. Johnson
S. J. Akrin F. B. Kovacs
J. L. Arnold D. J. Kreft
W. T. Clayton R. W. Kruzic
W. J. Bees A. S. Lester III
N. Y. Faransso J. F. Manning
S. C. Cyr F. C. Ouyang
H. C. Graber W. C. McGaughey
H. E. Gordon M. J. Pischke
G. W. Hembree J. R. Mitchell
M. J. Houle M. J. Rice
B. Kellerhall
K. M. Hudson C. D. Rodery
W. S. Jacobs W. P. Webb
Working Group on Acoustic Emissions (SG-VM) (SC V)

Subgroup on General Requirements (SC VIII)
B. H. Clark, Jr. J. F. Manning
P. M. Horrigan J. R. Mitchell R. M. Elliott, Chair A. S. Mann
V. Bogosian C. C. Neely
M. L. Coats A. S. Olivares
J. P. Glaspie S. C. Roberts
Working Group on Radiography (SG-VM) (SC V)
J. C. Keenan K. J. Schneider
G. W. Hembree, Chair N. Y. Faransso K. T. Lau A. J. Spencer
S. J. Akrin H. C. Graber W. E. Laveck, Jr.
T. Alexander F. B. Kovacs
J. E. Batey R. W. Kruzic Subgroup on Materials (SC VIII)
J. Cameron, Chair E. E. Morgenegg
Working Group on Ultrasonics (SG-VM) (SC V) D. C. Agarwal E. G. Nisbett
W. D. Doty J. T. Parsons
W. T. Clayton, Chair W. C. McGaughey W. D. Edsall D. W. Rahoi
O. F. Hedden R. Paillaman D. A. Franklin K. K. Tam
B. Kellerhall F. J. Sattler B. Heuer B. K. Thakur
E. K. Kietzman M. L. Shakinovsky M. Katcher E. Upitis
J. F. Manning W. M. Lundy
xv

Subgroup on Toughness (SC VIII) Subgroup on Materials (SC IX)
W. S. Jacobs, Chair J. L. Mooney M. L. Carpenter, Chair H. A. Sadler
R. J. Basile C. C. Neely L. P. Connor C. E. Sainz
J. Cameron T. T. Phillips P. D. Flenner C. E. Spaeder, Jr.
W. D. Doty M. D. Rana R. M. Jessee W. J. Sperko
H. E. Gordon J. W. Stokes C. C. Kim M. J. Stanko
G. B. Komora E. Upitis A. H. Miller R. R. Young
K. Mokhtarian
Special Working Group on Heat Transfer Equipment (SC VIII) Subgroup on Performance Qualification (SC IX)
G. B. Komora, Chair R. Mahadeen D. A. Bowers, Chair M. J. Houle

R. P. Zoldak, Secretary U. R. Miller V. A. Bell W. M. Lundy
C. F. Andreone T. W. Norton L. P. Connor R. D. McGuire
S. M. Caldwell F. Osweiller R. A. Coomes P. P. Norris
M. J. Holtz W. A. Treff P. D. Flenner W. K. Scattergood
W. G. Jandrasits S. Yokell G. Herrmann G. W. Spohn III
Special Working Group on High-Pressure Vessels (SC VIII)

Subgroup on Procedure Qualification (SC IX)
J. R. Sims, Jr., Chair M. M. James
P. A. Reddington, Secretary P. Jansson D. A. Bowers, Chair S. D. Reynolds, Jr.
L. P. Antalffy J. A. Kapp R. K. Brown, Jr. M. J. Rice
J. E. Baxter D. P. Kendall R. A. Johnson W. K. Scattergood
R. C. Biel A. K. Khare D. W. Mann W. J. Sperko
T. B. Boyd S. C. Mordre A. H. Miller P. L. Van Fosson
D. J. Burns G. J. Mraz P. P. Norris T. C. Wiesner
P. N. Chaku S. N. Pagay A. S. Olivares P. R. Wilt
E. L. Danfelt E. H. Perez F. C. Ouyang
R. E. Feigel L. M. Picqueur
D. M. Fryer E. D. Roll
J. L. Heck, Jr. W. L. Stewart SUBCOMMITTEE ON
A. H. Honza J. F. Sullivan FIBER-REINFORCED PLASTIC PRESSURE VESSELS (SC X)
V. T. Hwang F. W. Tatar P. J. Conlisk, Chair A. L. Newberry
D. Eisberg, Vice Chair D. J. Painter
SUBCOMMITTEE ON WELDING (SC IX) A. J. Roby, Secretary D. J. Pinell
K. M. Agrawal J. R. Richter
J. G. Feldstein, Chair A. H. Miller F. L. Brown J. A. Rolston
W. J. Sperko, Vice Chair B. R. Newmark J. L. Bustillos V. Sanchez
J. Labrador, Secretary P. P. Norris T. W. Cowley B. F. Shelley
R. Barkdoll A. S. Olivares T. J. Fowler J. H. Skaggs
D. A. Bowers S. D. Reynolds, Jr. L. E. Hunt P. R. Wilt
M. L. Carpenter G. W. Spohn III J. C. Murphy D. O. Yancey, Jr.
L. P. Connor M. J. Stanko
W. D. Doty P. L. Van Fosson
P. D. Flenner R. R. Young SUBCOMMITTEE ON
M. J. Houle W. K. Scattergood, Honorary NUCLEAR INSERVICE INSPECTION (SC XI)
W. M. Lundy Member
R. D. McGuire O. F. Hedden, Chair D. F. Landers
R. E. Gimple, Vice Chair T. F. Lentz
O. Martinez, Secretary J. T. Lindberg
Subgroup on Brazing (SC IX)
W. H. Bamford, Jr. G. C. Millman
M. J. Pischke, Chair C. F. Jeerings R. L. Beverly C. R. Osman
M. L. Carpenter A. H. Miller J. M. Bloom P. C. Riccardella
M. J. Houle C. Robino R. W. Boyce A. T. Roberts III
C. D. Cowfer L. Sage
D. D. Davis F. J. Schaaf, Jr.
Subgroup on General Requirements (SC IX)
R. L. Dyle R. J. Scott
B. R. Newmark, Chair D. W. Mann T. N. Epps III J. E. Staffiera
R. Barkdoll A. S. Olivares F. E. Gregor R. W. Swayne
P. R. Evans R. A. Weiss W. C. Holston C. W. Tahnk
P. C. Filean K. R. Willens K. Iida R. A. Yonekawa
R. M. Jessee R. D. Kerr K. K. Yoon
xvi

Honorary Members (SC XI) Subgroup on Liquid-Metal–Cooled Systems (SC XI)
S. H. Bush L. R. Katz C. G. McCargar, Chair R. Hundal

L. J. Chockie R. R. MacCary W. L. Chase R. W. King
J. P. Houstrup S. Hattori W. Kwant
Subgroup on Evaluation Standards (SC XI) Working Group on Liquid-Metal Reactor Covers
(SG-LMCS) (SC XI)
W. H. Bamford, Jr., Chair S. Ranganath
W. L. Chase, Chair R. Hundal
J. M. Bloom P. C. Riccardella
S. Hattori
R. C. Cipolla D. A. Scarth
R. M. Gamble W. L. Server
T. J. Griesbach C. A. Tomes Subgroup on Nondestructive Examination (SC XI)
K. Hasegawa A. W. Van Der Sluys
P. J. Hijeck K. R. Wichman C. D. Cowfer, Chair M. R. Hum
D. N. Hopkins G. M. Wilkowski D. C. Adamonis D. Lamond
K. Iida K. K. Yoon B. Bevins G. A. Lofthus
Y. Imamura S. Yukawa F. T. Carr M. C. Modes
J. G. Merkle C. B. Cheezem C. R. Osman
W. T. Clayton F. J. Schaaf, Jr.
F. J. Dodd J. C. Spanner, Jr.
Working Group on Flaw Evaluation (SG-ES) (SC XI) T. N. Epps III C. J. Wirtz
D. O. Henry
R. C. Cipolla, Chair J. G. Merkle
G. H. De Boo, Secretary J. S. Panesar
W. H. Bamford, Jr. S. Ranganath Working Group on Personnel Qualification and Surface,
M. Basol D. A. Scarth Visual, and Eddy Current Examination (SG-NDE) (SC XI)
J. M. Bloom T. S. Schurman
C. J. Wirtz, Secretary R. D. McGuire
E. Friedman W. L. Server
B. L. Curtis M. F. Sherwin
T. J. Griesbach F. A. Simonen
D. O. Henry D. Spake
F. D. Hayes K. R. Wichman
H. E. Houserman J. C. Spanner, Jr.
D. N. Hopkins G. M. Wilkowski
J. J. McArdle III D. S. Whitcomb
K. Iida K. K. Yoon
Y. Imamura S. Yukawa
M. Kupinski A. Zahoor Working Group on Pressure Testing (SG-NDE) (SC XI)
H. S. Mehta V. A. Zilberstein
F. J. Schaaf, Jr., Chair J. M. Boughman
D. Lamond, Secretary T. R. Bugelholl
Working Group on Operating Plant Criteria (SG-ES) (SC XI) T. M. Anselmi R. J. Cimoch
T. B. Basso W. N. Keisler
T. J. Griesbach, Chair H. S. Mehta
W. H. Bamford, Jr. J. S. Panesar
H. Behnke W. E. Pennell Working Group on Procedure Qualification
B. A. Bishop S. Ranganath and Volumetric Examination (SG-NDE) (SC XI)
W. F. Brady S. T. Rosinski F. T. Carr, Chair S. R. Doctor
E. Friedman W. L. Server C. D. Cowfer, Chair F. J. Dodd
S. R. Gosselin E. A. Siegel C. E. Larsen, Secretary T. N. Epps III
E. M. Hackett F. A. Simonen D. C. Adamonis B. Kellerhall
P. J. Hijeck T. D. Spry F. L. Becker G. A. Lofthus
M. Kupinski G. L. Stevens N. R. Bentley M. C. Modes
S. D. Leshnoff K. K. Yoon B. Bevins M. Saporito
P. Manbeck S. Yukawa C. B. Cheezem S. M. Walker
W. T. Clayton
Working Group on Pipe Flaw Evaluation (SG-ES) (SC XI)
Subgroup on Repairs, Replacements, and Modifications (SC XI)
D. A. Scarth, Chair K. Hasegawa
G. M. Wilkowski, Secretary D. N. Hopkins W. C. Holston, Chair R. D. Kerr
W. H. Bamford, Jr. K. Iida D. E. Waskey, Secretary D. F. Landers
R. C. Cipolla H. S. Mehta R. W. Boyce R. S. Lewis
N. G. Cofie J. S. Panesar M. N. Bressler M. S. McDonald
S. K. Daftuar K. K. Yoon R. E. Cantrell R. R. Stevenson
G. H. De Boo S. Yukawa R. E. Gimple R. W. Swayne
E. Friedman A. Zahoor C. E. Hartz R. E. Tome
L. F. Goyette V. A. Zilberstein R. A. Hermann R. A. Yonekawa
xvii

Working Group on Design Reconciliation (SG-RR&M) (SC XI) Working Group on Inspection of Systems and Components
(SG-WCS) (SC XI)
T. E. Hiss, Chair D. F. Landers
W. C. Holston, Chair R. W. Swayne E. Throckmorton, Chair I. Mach
J. T. Conner, Secretary A. H. Taufique C. Pendleton, Secretary T. K. McLellan
R. W. Boyce H. J. Thailer G. L. Belew G. C. Park
S. B. Brown R. E. Tome H. Q. Do C. M. Ross
E. V. Imbro R. Fougerousse C. W. Tahnk
T. C. Hinkle K. B. Thomas
Working Group on Responsibilities and Program Requirements M. R. Hum R. A. West
(SG-RR&M) (SC XI) S. D. Kulat J. Whitman
J. T. Lindberg
R. A. Yonekawa, Chair R. S. Lewis
R. R. Stevenson, Secretary M. S. McDonald
S. K. Fisher S. M. Swilley
Working Group on General Requirements (SC XI)
G. M. Foster A. J. Walcutt
R. D. Graham J. Ghergurovich, Alternate A. T. Roberts III, Chair R. K. Mattu
C. E. Hartz R. G. Edl, Secretary L. Sage
D. A. Graham R. J. Scott
Working Group on Welding and Special Repair Processes D. A. Jackson
(SG-RR&M) (SC XI)
D. E. Waskey, Chair R. D. Kerr Special Working Group on Editing and Review (SC XI)
R. E. Cantrell, Secretary B. R. Newton
P. D. Fisher P. P. Norris R. W. Swayne, Chair J. E. Staffiera
A. J. Giannuzzi J. E. O’Sullivan R. L. Beverly C. J. Wirtz
R. A. Hermann K. R. Willens M. P. Lintz
R. P. Indap
Subgroup on Water-Cooled Systems (SC XI) Special Working Group on Plant Life Extension (SC XI)
R. L. Dyle, Chair J. T. Lindberg F. E. Gregor, Chair H. W. Massie, Jr.

G. C. Park, Secretary M. P. Lintz M. P. Lintz, Secretary T. A. Meyer
W. J. Briggs W. E. Norris D. D. Davis D. W. Peltola
T. R. Bugelholl C. Pendleton D. A. Graham D. A. Piccione
D. D. Davis C. W. Tahnk D. L. Harrison V. N. Shah
M. L. Herrera E. Throckmorton P.-T. Kuo
T. C. Hinkle S. M. Walker
S. D. Kulat R. A. West
T. F. Lentz R. M. Kenneally, Alternate SUBCOMMITTEE ON TRANSPORT TANKS (SC XII)
A. Selz, Chair T. P. Pastor

Working Group on Containment (SG-WCS) (SC XI)
P. D. Stumpf, Secretary M. D. Rana
J. E. Staffiera, Chair C. N. Krishnaswamy A. N. Antoniou C. M. Serratella
H. G. Ashar M. P. Lintz C. Becht IV G. R. Stoeckinger
W. J. Briggs D. Naus S. C. Cyr N. Surtees
K. K. N. Chao S. C. Petitgout M. Hennemand J. P. Swezy
M. J. Ferlisi G. W. Robin C. H. Hochman A. P. Varghese
H. T. Hill R. T. Zak G. G. Karcher S. V. Voorhees
R. D. Hough W. E. Norris, Alternate P. P. Laluc C. H. Walters
G. McRae W. L. White
M. R. Minick
Working Group on Implementation of Risk-Based Examination
(SG-WCS) (SC XI)
S. D. Kulat, Chair J. T. Lindberg Subgroup on Design and Materials (SC XII)
J. M. Agold, Secretary I. Mach
S. A. Ali R. K. Mattu M. D. Rana, Chair T. P. Pastor
B. A. Bishop A. McNeill III C. Becht IV J. L. Rademacher
J. W. Connor P. J. O’Regan D. A. Canonico T. A. Rogers
H. Q. Do J. H. Phillips W. D. Doty C. M. Serratella
R. Fougerousse F. A. Simonen G. G. Karcher A. P. Varghese
S. R. Gosselin T. V. Vo P. P. Laluc M. R. Ward
M. R. Graybeal R. A. West M. Manikkam E. Whittle
M. L. Herrera S. L. McWilliams
xviii

Subgroup on Fabrication and Inspection (SC XII) Subgroup on Design Analysis (SC-D)
S. V. Voorhees, Chair D. J. Kreft T. P. Pastor, Secretary A. Kalnins

M. Burch G. McRae M. R. Breach W. J. Koves
D. A. Canonico M. R. Minick P. J. Conlisk T. H. Liu
M. L. Coats N. Surtees A. G. Eggers O. Maekawa
M. Hennemand J. P. Swezy J. L. Hechmer E. L. Thomas, Jr.
L. D. Holsinger G. L. Hollinger R. A. Whipple
Subgroup on General Requirements (SC XII)

Subgroup on Elevated Temperature Design (SC-D)
C. H. Hochman, Chair J. C. Keenan
C. Becht IV, Chair W. J. O’Donnell
T. Alexander T. B. Lee
J. M. Corum, Secretary D. A. Osage
A. N. Antoniou F. A. Licari
C. R. Brinkman J. S. Porowski
J. F. Cannon G. R. Stoeckinger
R. D. Campbell C. C. Schultz, Jr.
J. L. Freiler C. H. Walters
D. S. Griffin L. K. Severud
M. A. Garrett W. L. White
R. I. Jetter D. F. Shaw
K. L. Gilmore L. Wolpert
C. Lawton A. L. Snow
SUBCOMMITTEE ON BOILER AND

PRESSURE VESSEL ACCREDITATION (SC-BPVA) Subgroup on Fatigue Strength (SC-D)
A. J. Spencer, Chair R. L. Williams W. J. O’Donnell, Chair G. Kharshafdjian

C. E. Ford, Vice Chair W. J. Bees, Alternate P. R. Donavin C. Lawton
A. J. Justin, Vice Chair V. A. Bell, Alternate J. A. Hayward A. Merend
K. I. Baron, Secretary V. Bogosian, Alternate J. L. Hechmer H. H. Ziada
M. B. Doherty M. A. De Vries, Alternate D. P. Jones
D. A. Douin P. D. Flenner, Alternate
P. D. Edwards L. J. Kuchera, Alternate
R. M. Elliott W. C. LaRochelle, Alternate Subgroup on Openings (SC-D)
R. G. Friend A. S. Lester III, Alternate
R. C. Howard K. M. McTague, Alternate R. W. Mikitka, Secretary J. P. Madden
B. B. MacDonald G. P. Milley, Alternate M. R. Breach K. C. Morrison
M. L. Sisk P. G. Scheckermann, Alternate G. G. Graven D. R. Palmer
B. C. Turczynski N. Surtees, Alternate V. T. Hwang M. D. Rana
S. C. Lou E. C. Rodabaugh
R. B. Luney
SUBCOMMITTEE ON NUCLEAR ACCREDITATION (SC-NA)
T. E. Quaka, Chair A. J. Spencer

R. R. Stevenson, Vice Chair R. W. Boyce, Alternate Special Working Group on Bolted Flanged Joints (SC-D)
F. E. Zusman, Secretary R. E. Ciemiewicz, Alternate
R. W. Mikitka, Chair S. N. Pagay
V. Bogosian S. Dasgupta, Alternate
G. D. Bibel P. G. Scheckermann
M. N. Bressler P. D. Edwards, Alternate
R. M. Elliott R. W. Schneider
G. Deily S. M. Goodwin, Alternate
A. S. Lester III R. D. Schueler, Jr.
F. R. Drahos D. H. Hanrath, Alternate
E. Michalopoulos A. Selz
J. E. Harris R. C. Howard, Alternate
M. Higuchi K. A. Huber, Alternate
M. Kotb A. J. Justin, Alternate
W. C. LaRochelle N. C. Kist, Alternate SUBCOMMITTEE ON
R. P. McIntyre A. A. Lotfi, Alternate SAFETY VALVE REQUIREMENTS (SC-SVR)
H. B. Prasse O. E. Trapp, Staff Represen-
A. T. Roberts III tative E. C. Kistner, Jr., Chair S. F. Harrison, Jr.
M. D. Bernstein, Vice Chair W. F. Hart
U. D’Urso, Secretary H. D. Michael
SUBCOMMITTEE ON DESIGN (SC-D) J. F. Ball D. K. Peetz
S. Cammeresi J. W. Reynolds
D. P. Jones, Chair U. R. Miller J. A. Cox D. J. Scallan
E. H. Maradiaga, Secretary K. C. Morrison R. D. Danzy A. J. Spencer
R. W. Barnes W. J. O’Donnell D. B. De Michael J. C. Standfast
C. Becht IV R. D. Schueler, Jr. R. J. Doelling J. A. West
G. G. Graven A. Selz R. G. Friend T. J. Ferrigan, Alternate
R. W. Mikitka H. I. Gregg
xix

Subgroup on Design (SC-SVR) Subgroup on Testing (SC-SVR)
R. G. Friend, Chair S. R. Irvin, Sr. S. F. Harrison, Jr., Chair D. M. Papa

R. D. Danzy P. R. Sievert S. Cammeresi D. J. Scallan
D. B. De Michael A. J. Spencer J. A. Cox B. S. York
R. J. Doelling T. R. Tarbay W. F. Hart
H. I. Gregg J. A. West
Subgroup on General Requirements (SC-SVR)
M. D. Bernstein, Chair D. K. Peetz

J. F. Ball J. W. Reynolds
J. P. Glaspie J. W. Richardson
H. D. Michael J. C. Standfast
C. A. Neumann
xx

PREFACE TO SECTION XI
INTRODUCTION These responsibilities include:

(a) provision of access in the design and arrangement
Section XI, Rules for Inservice Inspection of Nuclear of the plant to conduct the examination and tests;
Power Plant Components, of the ASME Boiler and (b) development of plans and schedules, including
Pressure Vessel Code provides requirements for exami- detailed examination and testing procedures for filing
nation, testing, and inspection of components and sys- with the enforcement and regulatory authorities having
tems, and repair/replacement activities in a nuclear jurisdiction at the plant site;
power plant. Application of this Section of the Code (c) conduct of the program of examination and tests,
begins when the requirements of the Construction Code system leakage and hydrostatic pressure tests; and
have been satisfied. (d) recording of the results of the examinations and
tests, including corrective actions required and the
GENERAL actions taken.
The rules of this Section constitute requirements to
maintain the nuclear power plant and to return the DUTIES OF THE AUTHORIZED A00
plant to service, following plant outages, in a safe and NUCLEAR INSERVICE INSPECTOR
expeditious manner. The rules require a mandatory
program of examinations, testing, and inspections to Section XI differs from Section VI, Recommended
evidence adequate safety. The rules also stipulate duties Rules for the Care and Operation of Heating Boilers,
of the Authorized Nuclear Inservice Inspector to verify and Section VII, Recommended Guidelines for the Care
that the mandatory program has been completed, permit- of Power Boilers, in that the requirements for Inservice
ting the plant to return to service in an expeditious Inspection of Nuclear Power Plants are mandatory,
manner. while the other two Sections are recommended practices.
Duties of the Authorized Nuclear Inservice Inspector
A00 INSERVICE TESTING OF PUMP AND VALVES are assigned by Section XI to verify that the responsibili-
ties of the Owner and the mandatory requirements of
With the 1998 Edition with the 2000 Addenda, all this Section are met. Duties of the Authorized Nuclear
requirements for testing pumps and valves have been Inservice Inspector include the following:
removed from Section XI, Division 1. These require- (a) verifying system pressure tests;
ments are now located in the ASME Code for Operation (b) reviewing nondestructive examination procedures
and Maintenance of Nuclear Power Plants. and Repair /Replacement Programs and Plans; and
(c) verifying that the visual examinations and tests
A00 OWNER RESPONSIBILITIES have been completed and the results recorded.
The Owner of the nuclear power plant is assigned Listed as one of the duties is the prerogative of the
the responsibilities to develop a program which will Inspector to require requalification of any operator or
demonstrate conformance to the requirements of this procedure when he has reason to believe the require-
Section of the Code. ments are not being met.
xxi

[This is electronic file SEC11$PREF page #21
ORGANIZATION OF SECTION XI A99
A00
1. DIVISIONS IGG Reactor Internals

Section XI consists of three Divisions, as follows: IGH Elevated Temperature Material
Division 1—Rules for Inspection and Testing of IGI Graphite and Thermal Insulation
Components of Light-Water Cooled Plants Materials
Division 2—Rules for Inspection and Testing of IGK Concrete Reactor Vessels
Components of Gas-Cooled Plants IGP Pumps
Division 3—Rules for Inspection and Testing of IGQ Compressors
Components of Liquid-Metal Cooled Plants IGV Valves
Division 3 consists of Subsections covering the fol-

2. SUBSECTIONS lowing aspects of the rules:
The Divisions are broken down into Subsections
Subsection Title
which are designated by capital letters, preceded by
the letters IW in Division 1, by the letters IG in IMA General Requirements
Division 2, and by the letters IM in Division 3. IMB Class 1 Components
Division 1 consists of Subsections covering the fol- IMC Class 2 Components
lowing aspects of the rules: IMD Class 3 Components
IMF Class 1, 2, and 3 Component
Supports
Subsection Title IMV Valves
IWA General Requirements Subsections are divided into Articles, Subarticles,
IWB Class 1 Components paragraphs, and, where necessary, into subparagraphs.
IWC Class 2 Components
IWD Class 3 Components
IWE Class MC and CC Components 3. ARTICLES
IWF Class 1, 2, 3, and MC Articles are designated by the applicable letters indi-
Component Supports cated above for the Subsections, followed by Arabic
IWG Core Internal Structures numbers, such as IWA-1000 or IWB-2000. Where
(In course of preparation) possible, Articles dealing with the same general topics
IWL Class CC are given the same number in each Subsection, in
Concrete Components accordance with the following scheme:
Article Number Title

Division 2 consists of Subsections covering the fol- 1000 Scope and Responsibility
lowing aspects of the rules: 2000 Examination and Inspection
3000 Acceptance Standards
4000 Repair /Replacement
Subsection Title Activities
IGA General Requirements 5000 System Pressure Tests
IGB Class 1 Components 6000 Records and Reports
IGC Class 2 Components The numbering of Articles and material contained
IGD Class 3 Components in the Articles may not, however, be consecutive. Due
xxiii

[This is electronic file SEC11$$OXI page #23
to the fact that the complete outline may cover phases relate to nuclear power plant design or construction
not applicable to a particular Subsection or Article, the requirements.
requirements have been prepared with some gaps in (3) Section V, Nondestructive Examination. Sec-
the numbering. tion V references begin with the letter “T” and relate
to the nondestructive examination of material or welds.
4. SUBARTICLES (4) Section IX, Welding and Brazing Qualifica-
Subarticles are numbered in units of 100, such as tions. Section IX references begin with the letter “Q”
IWA-1100 or IWA-1200. and relate to welding and brazing requirements.
(c) References to Specifications and Standards Other
Than Published in Code Sections
5. SUBSUBARTICLES (1) Specifications for examination methods and
Subsubarticles are numbered in units of 10, such as acceptance standards to be used in connection with
IWA-2130, and may have no text. When a number them are published by the American Society for Testing
such as IWA-1110 is followed by text, it is considered
and Materials. For example, reference to ASTM E 71-
a paragraph.
64 refers to the specification so designated and published
by American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM),
6. PARAGRAPHS 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428.
Paragraphs are numbered in units of 1, such as IWA- (2) Recommended practices for qualifying and cer-
2131 or IWA-2132. tifying nondestructive examination personnel are pub-
lished by the American Society for Nondestructive
7. SUBPARAGRAPHS Testing (ASNT). These documents are designated SNT-
Subparagraphs, when they are major subdivisions of TC-1A and CP-189. A reference to SNT-TC-1A or
a paragraph, are designated by adding a decimal fol- CP-189 shall be understood to mean the practice and
lowed by one or more digits to the paragraph number, its supplements, so designated and published by the
such as IWA-1111.1 or IWA-1111.2. When they are American Society for Nondestructive Testing (ASNT),
minor subdivisions of a paragraph, subparagraphs may 1711 Arlingate Lane, P. O. Box 28518, Columbus, OH
be designated by lowercase letters in parentheses, such 43228-0518.
as IWA-1111(a) or IWA-1111(b). (3) Specifications and standards for materials,
processes, examination and test procedures, qualifica-
tions of personnel, and other requirements of the Code
8. REFERENCES
approved by the American National Standards Institute
References used within this Section generally fall
are designated by the letters ANSI followed by the
into one of six categories, as explained below.
serialization for the particular specification or standard.
(a) References to Other Portions of This Section.
Standards published by ASME are available from
When a reference is made to another Article, Subarticle,
ASME, 22 Law Drive, Box 2300, Fairfield, NJ
or paragraph number, all numbers subsidiary to that
07007-2300.
reference shall be included. For example, reference to
IWA-2000 includes all materials in Article IWA-2000; (4) Specifications and standards for materials, pro-
reference to IWA-2200 includes all material in Subar- cesses, examination and test procedures, and other
ticle IWA-2200; reference to IWA-2220 includes all requirements of the Code relating to concrete are listed
paragraphs in IWA-2220, IWA-2221, and IWA-2222. in Table IWA-1600-1, designated by the letters ACI, and
(b) References to Other Sections. Other Sections are approved and published by the American Concrete
referred to in Section XI are as follows: Institute. Standards published by the American Concrete
(1) Section II, Material Specifications. When a Institute can be obtained by writing ACI, Box 19150,
requirement for a material or for the examination or 22400 West Seven Mile Road, Detroit, MI 48219.
testing of a material is to be in accordance with a (5) Specifications and standards for determining
specification such as SA-105, SA-370, or SB-160, the water chemistry as identified in Table IWA-1600-1 by
reference is to material specifications in Section II. the letter designation APHA are approved and published
These references begin with the letter “S.” Materials by the American Public Health Association. Standards
conforming to ASTM specifications may be used in published by the American Public Health Association
accordance with the provisions of the last paragraph can be obtained by writing APHA, 1015 15th Street,
of the Foreword to the Boiler Code. NW, Washington, D.C. 20005.
(2) Section III, Nuclear Power Plant Components. (6) Specifications and standards for welding are
Section III references begin with the letter “N” and listed in Table IWA-1600-1 and are approved and
xxiv

SUBSECTION IWA A99
A00
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
IWA-1000 Scope and Responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

IWA-1100 Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
IWA-1200 Jurisdiction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
IWA-1300 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
IWA-1310 Components Subject to Inspection and Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
IWA-1320 Classifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
IWA-1400 Owner’s Responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
IWA-1500 Accessibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
IWA-1600 Referenced Standards and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
IWA-2000 Examination and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

IWA-2100 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
IWA-2110 Duties of the Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
IWA-2120 Qualification of Authorized Inspection Agencies, Inspectors, and Supervisors . . . . . . 14
IWA-2130 Access for Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
IWA-2200 Examination Methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
IWA-2210 Visual Examinations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
IWA-2211 VT-1 Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
IWA-2215 Replication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
IWA-2216 Remote Visual Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
IWA-2220 Surface Examination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
IWA-2221 Magnetic Particle Examination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
IWA-2222 Liquid Penetrant Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
IWA-2223 Eddy Current Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
IWA-2230 Volumetric Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
IWA-2231 Radiographic Examination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
IWA-2232 Ultrasonic Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
IWA-2233 Eddy Current Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
IWA-2234 Acoustic Emission Examination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1
IWA-2240 Alternative Examinations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
IWA-2300 Qualifications of Nondestructive Examination Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
IWA-2310 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
IWA-2311 Written Practice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
IWA-2312 NDE Methods Listed in ANSI /ASNT CP-189 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
IWA-2313 NDE Methods Not Listed in ANSI /ASNT CP-189 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
IWA-2314 Certification and Recertification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
IWA-2315 Personnel Requirements For Eddy Current Examination of Steam Generator
Tubing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
ASME B&PVC SEC11$$$U5 05-31-00 11:14:35 pd: sec11 Rev 15.04

[This is electronic file SEC11$$$$6 page #3 pd: bctoc
IWA-2316 Alternative Qualifications of VT-2 Visual Examination Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
IWA-2317 Alternative Qualifications of VT-3 Visual Examination Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
IWA-2320 Qualification Examinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
IWA-2321 Vision Tests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
IWA-2322 Near-Distance Test Chart Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
IWA-2323 Level III Personnel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
IWA-2330 Level I Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
IWA-2340 Level III Education . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
IWA-2350 Limited Certification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
IWA-2360 Level I and Level II Training and Experience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
IWA-2370 Level III Experience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
IWA-2380 NDE Instructor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
IWA-2400 Inspection Program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
IWA-2410 Application of Code Edition and Addenda. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
IWA-2420 Inspection Plans and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
IWA-2425 Inspection Plan and Schedule Supporting Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
IWA-2430 Inspection Intervals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
IWA-2431 Inspection Program A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
IWA-2432 Inspection Program B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
IWA-2440 Application of Code Cases. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
IWA-2441 Section XI Code Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
IWA-2442 Annulled Section XI Code Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
IWA-2443 Code Cases for Other Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
IWA-2500 Extent of Examination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
IWA-2600 Weld Reference System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
IWA-2610 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
IWA-2620 Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
IWA-2630 Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
IWA-2640 Other Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
IWA-2641 Layout of Component Reference Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
IWA-3000 Standards for Examination Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

IWA-3100 Evaluation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
IWA-3200 Significant Digits for Limiting Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
IWA-3300 Flaw Characterization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
IWA-3310 Surface Planar Flaws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
IWA-3320 Subsurface Planar Flaws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
IWA-3330 Multiple Planar Flaws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
IWA-3340 Nonplanar Flaws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
IWA-3350 Parallel Planar Flaws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
IWA-3360 Laminar Flaws. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
IWA-3370 Radiographic Examination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
IWA-3380 Multiple Nonaligned Coplanar Flaws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
IWA-3390 Multiple Aligned Separate Flaws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
IWA-3400 Linear Flaws Detected by Surface or Volumetric Examinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
IWA-4000 Repair /Replacement Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

IWA-4100 General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
IWA-4110 Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
IWA-4120 Applicability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
IWA-4130 Alternative Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
IWA-4131 Small Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

[This is electronic SEC11$$$$6 page #4 pd: bctoc
IWA-4131.1 Applicability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
IWA-4131.2 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
IWA-4132 Items Rotated From Stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
IWA-4133 Mechanical Clamping Devices Used as Piping Pressure Boundary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
IWA-4140 Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
IWA-4141 Owner’s Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
IWA-4142 Repair /Replacement Organization’s Quality Assurance Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
IWA-4143 Stamping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
IWA-4150 Repair /Replacement Program and Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
IWA-4160 Verification of Acceptability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
IWA-4170 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
IWA-4180 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
IWA-4200 Items for Repair /Replacement Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
IWA-4220 Code Applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
IWA-4221 Construction Code and Owner’s Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
IWA-4222 Reconciliation of Code and Owner’s Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
IWA-4223 Reconciliation of Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
IWA-4224 Reconciliation of Material. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
IWA-4224.1 Identical Material Procured to a Later Edition or Addenda of the Construction
Code, Section III, or Material Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
IWA-4224.2 Identical Material Procured to an Earlier Construction Code Edition or Addenda
or Material Specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
IWA-4224.3 Use of a Different Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
IWA-4224.4 Substitution of Material Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
IWA-4225 Reconciliation of Parts, Appurtenances, and Piping Subassemblies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
IWA-4226 Reconciliation of Design Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
IWA-4226.1 Design to All Requirements of a Later Edition or Addenda of the Construction
Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
IWA-4226.2 Design to Portions of the Requirements of a Later Edition or Addenda of the
Construction Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
IWA-4300 Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
IWA-4311 Material, Design, or Configuration Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
IWA-4320 Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
IWA-4321 Class 1 Mechanical Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
IWA-4330 Rerating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
IWA-4332 Flaw Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
IWA-4333 Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
IWA-4334 Pressure Test Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
IWA-4340 Mitigation of Defects by Modification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
IWA-4400 Welding, Brazing, Defect Removal, and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
IWA-4420 Construction Code Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
IWA-4421 Construction Code and Owner’s Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
IWA-4422 Defect Removal and Examination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
IWA-4422.1 Defect Removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
IWA-4422.2 Nondestructive Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
IWA-4422.2.1 Defect Removal Without Welding or Brazing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
IWA-4422.2.2 Defect Removal Followed by Welding or Brazing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
IWA-4430 Alternatives to Construction Code Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
IWA-4440 Welding and Welder Qualification (Including Welding Operators) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
IWA-4450 Mechanical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
IWA-4451 Helical-Coil Threaded Inserts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

IWA-4451.1 Class 1, 2, and 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
IWA-4460 Metal Removal Processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
IWA-4461 Thermal Removal Processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
IWA-4461.1 P-No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
IWA-4461.2 P-Nos. 3, 4, 5A, 5B, 5C, 6, 7, 9A, 9B, 9C, 10A, 10B, 10C, 10E through 10K,
and 11A Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
IWA-4461.3 P-Nos. 8 and 43 Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
IWA-4461.4 Alternative to Mechanical Processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
IWA-4462 Mechanical Removal Processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
IWA-4500 Examination and Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
IWA-4520 Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
IWA-4530 Preservice Inspection and Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
IWA-4540 Pressure Testing of Class 1, 2, and 3 Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
IWA-4550 Class MC and Metallic Portions of Class CC Containments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
IWA-4600 Alternative Welding Methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
IWA-4610 General Requirements for All Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
IWA-4611 Defect Removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
IWA-4611.1 General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
IWA-4611.2 Examination Following Defect Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
IWA-4620 Similar Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
IWA-4622 Welding Qualifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
IWA-4623 Welding Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
IWA-4623.1 Shielded Metal-Arc Welding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
IWA-4623.2 Gas Tungsten-Arc Welding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
IWA-4624 Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
IWA-4630 Dissimilar Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
IWA-4632 Welding Procedure Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
IWA-4634 Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
IWA-4640 Cladding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
IWA-4642 Welding Procedure Qualifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
IWA-4644 Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
IWA-4650 Butter Bead — Temper Bead Welding for Class MC and for Class CC
Metallic Liners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
IWA-4652 Welding Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
IWA-4652.2 Procedure Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
IWA-4652.3 Performance Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
IWA-4652.4 Production Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
IWA-4653 Welding Technique. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
IWA-4654 Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
IWA-4655 Welding Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
IWA-4660 Underwater Welding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

IWA-4661 Scope and General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
IWA-4662 Additional Variables for Dry Underwater Welding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
IWA-4663 Additional Variables for Wet Underwater Welding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
IWA-4664 Filler Metal Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
IWA-4665 Alternative Procedure Qualification Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
IWA-4666 Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
IWA-4666.1 Surface Examination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
IWA-4666.2 Volumetric Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
IWA-4700 Heat Exchanger Tubing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
IWA-4710 Plugging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
IWA-4711 Explosive Welding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
IWA-4711.2 Welding Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
IWA-4711.3 Plugging Procedure Specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
IWA-4711.4 Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
IWA-4712 Fusion Welding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
IWA-4712.1 Material Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
IWA-4712.2 Welding Qualifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
IWA-4712.3 Plugging Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
IWA-4712.4 Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
IWA-4712.5 Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
IWA-4720 Sleeving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
IWA-4721.1 Sleeves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
IWA-4721.2 Sleeving Procedure Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
IWA-4721.3 Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
IWA-4721.4 Sleeving by a Combination of Processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
IWA-4721.5 Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
IWA-4722 Explosive Welding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
IWA-4722.2 Explosive Welding Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
IWA-4722.4 Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
IWA-4723 Fusion Welding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
IWA-4723.2 Fusion Welding Qualification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
IWA-4723.4 Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
IWA-4724 Brazing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
IWA-4724.2 Brazing Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
IWA-4724.4 Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
IWA-4725 Expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
IWA-4725.2 Expansion Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
IWA-4725.4 Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

IWA-5000 System Pressure Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
IWA-5100 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
IWA-5110 Periodic System Pressure Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
IWA-5120 System Pressure Tests for Repair /Replacement Activities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
IWA-5200 System Test Requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
IWA-5210 Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
IWA-5211 Test Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
IWA-5212 Pressure and Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
IWA-5213 Test Condition Holding Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
IWA-5214 Preservice Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
IWA-5220 Test Pressurization Boundaries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
IWA-5221 System Leakage Test Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
IWA-5222 System Hydrostatic Test Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
IWA-5240 Visual Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
IWA-5241 Noninsulated Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
IWA-5242 Insulated Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
IWA-5243 Components With Leakage Collection Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
IWA-5244 Buried Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
IWA-5245 Elevated Temperature Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
IWA-5250 Corrective Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
IWA-5260 Instruments for System Hydrostatic Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
IWA-5261 Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
IWA-5262 Accuracy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
IWA-5263 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
IWA-5264 Ranges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
IWA-5265 Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
IWA-5300 Test Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
IWA-6000 Records and Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

IWA-6100 Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
IWA-6200 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
IWA-6210 Owner’s Responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
IWA-6220 Preparation of Abstract of Examination Required by Form NIS-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
IWA-6230 Summary Report Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
IWA-6240 Summary Report Submittal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
IWA-6300 Retention. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
IWA-6310 Maintenance of Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
IWA-6320 Reproduction and Microfilming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
IWA-6330 Construction Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
IWA-6340 Inservice Inspection Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
IWA-9000 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Figures
IWA-3310-1 Surface Planar Flaws Oriented in Plane Normal to Pressure Retaining Surface . . . . 26
IWA-3320-1 Subsurface Planar Flaws Oriented in Plane Normal to Pressure Retaining Surface . 27
IWA-3330-1 Multiple Planar Flaws Oriented in Plane Normal to Pressure Retaining Surface . . . 28
IWA-3340-1 Nonplanar Elliptical Subsurface Flaws. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
IWA-3350-1 Parallel Planar Flaws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
IWA-3360-1 Laminar Flaws. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

ARTICLE IWA-1000
SCOPE AND RESPONSIBILITY
A99 IWA-1100 SCOPE subject to review by the regulatory and enforcement

A00 authorities having jurisdiction at the plant site.
This Division provides requirements for inservice
inspection and testing of light-water cooled nuclear
power plants. The requirements identify the areas subject IWA-1320 CLASSIFICATIONS A99
to inspection, responsibilities, provisions for accessibil-
ity and inspectability, examination methods and proce- (a) Application of the rules of this Division shall
dures, personnel qualifications, frequency of inspection, be governed by the group classification criteria of the
record keeping and report requirements, procedures regulatory authority having jurisdiction at the plant site
for evaluation of inspection results and subsequent as follows.
disposition of results of evaluations, and repair /replace- (1) The rules of IWB shall be applied to those
ment activity requirements, including procurement, de- systems whose components are classified ASME Class 1.
sign, welding, brazing, defect removal, installation, (2) The rules of IWC shall be applied to those
examination, and pressure testing. systems whose components are classified ASME Class 2.
(3) The rules of IWD shall be applied to those
systems whose components are classified ASME Class 3.
IWA-1200 JURISDICTION (4) The requirements of IWE shall be applied to
components classified ASME Class MC and to metallic
The jurisdiction of this Division covers individual shell and penetration liners classified ASME Class CC.
components and complete plants that have met all the (5) The requirements of IWF shall be applied to
requirements of the Construction Code, commencing supports classified ASME Class 1, 2, 3, or MC.
when the Construction Code requirements have been (6) The requirements of IWL shall be applied to
met, irrespective of physical location. When portions reinforced concrete and post-tensioning systems classi-
of systems or plants are completed at different times, fied ASME Class CC.
jurisdiction of this Division shall cover only those (b) Optional construction of a component within a
portions for which all of the construction requirements system boundary to a classification higher than the
have been met. Prior to installation, an item that has minimum class established in the component Design
met all requirements of the Construction Code may be Specification (either upgrading from Class 2 to Class
corrected using the rules of either the Construction 1 or from Class 3 to Class 2) shall not affect the
Code or this Division, as determined by the Owner. overall system classification by which the applicable
rules of this Division are determined.
(c) Where all components within the system bound-
IWA-1300 APPLICATION ary or isolable portions of the system boundary are
IWA-1310 COMPONENTS SUBJECT TO classified to a higher class than required by the group
classification criteria, the rules of IWA-1320(a) may
INSPECTION AND TESTING
be applied to the higher classification, provided the
Components identified in this Division for inspection rules of the applicable Subsection are applied in their
and testing shall be included in the inservice inspection entirety.
plan. These components include nuclear power plant (d) The portion of piping that penetrates a contain-
items such as vessels, containments, piping systems, ment vessel, which is required by Section III to be
pumps, valves, core support structures, and storage constructed to Class 1 or 2 rules for piping and which
tanks, including their respective supports. The selection may differ from the classification of the balance of
of components for the inservice inspection plan is the piping system, need not affect the overall system
11
ASME B&PVC SEC11$$U10 05-15-00 15:47:10 pd: sec11 Rev 15.04

IWA-1320 1998 SECTION XI, DIVISION 1 IWA-1600
classification that determines the applicable rules of (m) the retention and maintenance of all basic calibra-
this Division. tion blocks used for ultrasonic examination of the
(e) If systems safety criteria permit a system to be components;
nonnuclear safety Class and an Owner optionally classi- (n) documentation of a Quality Assurance Program
fies and constructs that system, or a portion thereof, in accordance with the following:
to Class 2 or Class 3 requirements, the application of (1) Title 10, Code of Federal Regulations, Part
the rules of IWA-1320(a) is at the option of the Owner 50; or
and is not a requirement of this Division. (2) ASME NQA-1, Parts II and III, Basic Require-
ments and Supplements.
(o) recording of regions in ferritic steel components
IWA-1400 OWNER’S RESPONSIBILITY where acceptance standards have been modified as
required in IWB-3410.2;
The responsibilities of the Owner of the nuclear
(p) recording of regions in components where flaws
power plant shall include the following:
or relevant conditions exceeding the acceptance stan-
(a) determination of the appropriate Code class(es)
dards have been evaluated by analysis to allow continued
for each component1 of the plant, and identification of
operation as permitted by IWB-3132.3, IWB-3142.4,
the system boundaries for each class of components
IWC-3122.3, IWC-3132.3, IWE-3122.3, IWF-3112.3,
subject to inspection and the components exempt from
IWF-3122.3, and IWL-3212. Any continued operation
examination requirements;
time or cycle limits inherent in the analysis shall also
(b) design and arrangement of system components
be recorded.
to include allowances for adequate access and clearances
for conduct of the examination and tests;
(c) preparation of plans, schedules, and inservice
IWA-1500 ACCESSIBILITY
inspection summary reports, and submittal of these
plans and reports to the enforcement and regulatory Provisions for accessibility shall include the following
authorities having jurisdiction at the plant site; considerations:2
(d) preparation of written examination instructions (a) access for the Inspector, examination personnel,
and procedures, including diagrams or system drawings and equipment necessary to conduct the examinations;
identifying the extent of areas of components subject (b) sufficient space for removal and storage of struc-
to examination; tural members, shielding, and insulation;
(e) verification of qualification to the required level (c) installation and support of handling machinery
of responsibility of personnel who perform the examina- (e.g., hoists) where required to facilitate removal, disas-
tions; sembly, and storage of equipment, components, and
(f) possession of an arrangement with an Authorized other materials;
Inspection Agency to provide inspection services; (d) performance of examinations alternative to those
(g) performance of required examinations and tests; specified in the event structural defects or indications are
(h) recording of examination and test results that revealed that may require such alternative examinations;
provide a basis for evaluation and facilitate comparison (e) performance of necessary operations associated
with the results of subsequent examinations; with repair /replacement activities.
(i) evaluation of examination and test results;
(j) performance of repair /replacement activities in
accordance with written programs and plans; IWA-1600 REFERENCED STANDARDS
(k) maintenance of adequate inspection, examination, AND SPECIFICATIONS
test, flaw evaluation, and repair /replacement activity
records such as radiographs, diagrams, drawings, calcu- When standards and specifications are referenced in
lations, examination and test data, description of proce- this Division, their revision date or indicator shall be
dures used, and evidence of personnel qualifications; as shown in Table IWA-1600-1.
(l) retention of all inspection, examination, test, and
repair /replacement activity records and flaw evaluation 2 Design considerations other than access provisions may be needed
calculations for the service lifetime of the component for specific system components to render inservice inspections practi-
or system; cal (such as surface finish of components subject to crud or corrosion
product buildup, material selection to minimize activation in service,
and shielding from irradiation effects).
1 Classification criteria are specified in 10 CFR 50.
12

[This is electronic SEC11$$$10 page #12
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Table IWA-1600-1
TABLE IWA-1600-1 98
REFERENCED STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS A00
Standard or Revision Date

Specification or Indicator
ACI 201.1 R-68 1984
ANSI/ASNT CP-189 1995
ANSI/AWS D 3.6 1989
APHA 427 1981, 15th Edition
APHA 4500-S2− 19th Edition
ASME QAI-1 1995
ASME NQA-1 1989
ASME/ANSI OM (Part 4) 1987 with OMa-1988
ASNT SNT-TC-1A 1984
ASTM D 95 1970
ASTM D 512 1981
ASTM D 974 1987
ASTM D 992 1978
ASTM D 3867 1979
ASTM D 4327 1988
ASTM E 29 1967
ASTM E 185 1982
ASTM E 380 1972
ASTM E 1065 1987A
ASTM E 1324 1990
13

[This is electronic file SEC11$$U10 page #13
ARTICLE IWA-2000
EXAMINATION AND INSPECTION
IWA-2100 GENERAL dures and by personnel employed by the Owner or

the Owner’s agent and qualified in accordance with
A99 IWA-2110 DUTIES OF THE INSPECTOR IWA-2300.
A00
(a) The Inspector shall review the inspection plan (h) The Inspector may require, at any time, requalifi-
and, as necessary, the implementation schedule (IWA- cation of any procedure or operator if the Inspector
2420) prior to the start of preservice inspection and has reason to believe that the requirements are not
each inspection interval. The review shall cover any being met.
features that are affected by the requirements of this (i) The Inspector shall certify the examination rec-
Division, as applicable, and shall include the following: ords after verifying that the requirements have been
(1) examination categories and items met and that the records are correct.
(2) test and examination requirements (j) The Inspector shall verify that repair /replacement
(3) examination methods activities are performed in accordance with the require-
(4) percentage of parts selected for examination ments of the Owner’s Repair /Replacement Program.
(5) disposition of test results (k) The Inspector shall review the Quality Assurance
(6) test frequency Program for repair/replacement activities and its imple-
mentation.
(7) system pressure tests
(8) sequence of successive examinations
Shop and field preservice examinations are exempt from
prior review.
(b) The Inspector shall review any revisions to the
inspection plan and, as necessary, the implementation
schedule during the preservice inspection or the inspec-
tion interval.
(c) The Inspector shall submit a report to the Owner
documenting review of the items identified in IWA- IWA-2120 QUALIFICATION OF
2110(a) and (b). AUTHORIZED INSPECTION
(d) The Inspector shall verify that the required exami- AGENCIES, INSPECTORS, AND
nations and system pressure tests have been performed SUPERVISORS
and the results recorded. (a) The inspection required by this Division shall
(e) The Inspector shall verify that the required visual be performed:
examinations have been performed and the results rec- (1) where the plant is in the United States, by an
orded. Inspector employed by a State or Municipality of the
(f) The Inspector shall perform any additional inves- United States or an Inspector regularly employed by
tigations necessary to verify that all applicable require- an insurance company authorized to write boiler and
ments of IWA-2110 have been met. pressure vessel insurance in the United States;
(g) The Inspector shall verify that the nondestructive (2) where the plant is in Canada, by an Inspector
examination methods used follow the techniques speci- employed by a Canadian Province or, if authorized by
fied in this Division and that the examinations are the Province in which the plant is located, by an
performed in accordance with written qualified proce- Inspector regularly employed by an insurance company
14

IWA-2120 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS IWA-2213
licensed to write boiler and pressure vessel insurance without an ascender or descender (e.g., a, c, e, o)
in that Province; meeting Table IWA-2210-1 is required. Measurements
(3) by an Inspector employed by other enforcement of the near-distance test chart shall be made once
authorities in the United States or Canada having juris- before initial use with an optical comparator (10X or
diction over the designated plant. greater) or other suitable instrument to verify that the
(b) The Authorized Inspection Agency, including its height of a representative lower case character, for the
staff of Authorized Nuclear Inservice Inspector Supervi- selected type size, meets the requirements of Table
sors and the Inspectors, shall meet the requirements of IWA-2210-1.
ASME QAI-1. (c) Remote examination may be substituted for direct
(c) The Authorized Inspection Agency shall be ac- examination. The remote examination procedure shall
credited by ASME in accordance with the provisions be demonstrated to resolve the selected test chart char-
set forth in ASME QAI-1. acters.
(d) Alternatives to the direct visual examination dis-
tance requirements of Section V may be used as
IWA-2130 ACCESS FOR INSPECTOR specified in Table IWA-2210-1.
(e) It is not necessary to measure illumination levels
The Owner shall arrange for an Inspector to have on each examination surface when the same portable
access to all parts of the plant as necessary to make light source or similar installed lighting equipment is
the required inspections. The Owner shall keep the demonstrated to provide the illumination specified in
Inspector informed of the progress of the preparatory Table IWA-2210-1 at the maximum examination dis-
work necessary to permit inspections and shall notify tance.
the Inspector at a time reasonably in advance of when (f) The adequacy of the illumination levels from
the components will be ready for inspection. battery powered portable lights shall be checked before
and after each examination or series of examinations,
not to exceed 4 hr between checks. In lieu of using
a light meter, these checks may be made by verifying
IWA-2200 EXAMINATION METHODS
that the illumination is adequate (i.e., no discernable
(a) The three types of examinations used during degradation in the visual examination resolution of the
inservice inspection are defined as visual, surface, and procedure demonstration test chart characters.
volumetric. The examination method to be used is
specified in Tables IWB-, IWC-, IWD-, IWE-, IWF-, IWA-2211 VT-1 Examination
and IWL-2500-1. If a component must be examined
in a high radiation area, remotely controlled equipment VT-1 examinations are conducted to detect disconti-
may be advisable. nuities and imperfections on the surfaces of components,
including such conditions as cracks, wear, corrosion,
(b) When preparation of a surface for nondestructive
or erosion.
examination is required, the preparation shall be by a
mechanical method. Such surfaces shall be blended
into the surrounding area as may be required to perform IWA-2212 VT-2 Examination
the examination. The wall thickness shall not be reduced (a) VT-2 examinations are conducted to detect evi-
below the minimum thickness required by design. Non- dence of leakage from pressure retaining components,
mandatory Appendix D may be used for such surface with or without leakage collection systems, as required
preparation. during the conduct of system pressure test.
(b) VT-2 examinations shall be conducted in accord-
ance with IWA-5000. For direct examination, the Table
98 IWA-2210 VISUAL EXAMINATIONS IWA-2210-1 maximum examination distance shall apply
A00 to the distance from the eye to the surfaces being
Visual examinations shall be conducted in accordance examined.
with Section V, Article 9, Table IWA-2210-1, and the
following.
IWA-2213 VT-3 Examination
(a) A written procedure and report of examination
results is required. VT-3 examinations are conducted to determine the
(b) For procedure demonstration, a near-distance vi- general mechanical and structural condition of compo-
sion test chart containing text with lower case characters nents and their supports by verifying parameters such
15

[This is electronic file SEC11$$$15 page #15
TABLE IWA-2210-1 VISUAL EXAMINATIONS
Maximum Procedure
Minimum Maximum Direct Demonstration Lower
Visual Illumination, Examination Case Character Height,
Examination fc Distance, ft in.
VT-1 50 2 0.044
VT-2 15 6 0.158
VT-3 50 4 0.105
as clearances, settings, and physical displacements; and IWA-2222 Liquid Penetrant Examination
to detect discontinuities and imperfections, such as loss
Liquid penetrant examination shall be conducted in
of integrity at bolted or welded connections, loose or
accordance with Section V, Article 6.
missing parts, debris, corrosion, wear, or erosion. VT-
3 includes examinations for conditions that could affect
operability or functional adequacy of snubbers and IWA-2223 Eddy Current Examination
constant load and spring type supports.
Eddy current examination for detection of surface
flaws shall be conducted in accordance with Appen-
IWA-2215 Replication dix IV.
Surface replication methods may be used for VT-1
and VT-3 examinations when the surface resolution is
at least equivalent to that of direct visual observation. IWA-2230 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
A volumetric examination indicates the presence of
IWA-2216 Remote Visual Examination discontinuities throughout the volume of material and
may be conducted from either the inside or outside
In addition to the requirements of Section V, Article surface of a component.
9, when remote visual examination is substituted for
direct visual examination, the remote visual examination
system shall have the capability of distinguishing and IWA-2231 Radiographic Examination
differentiating between the colors applicable to the
requirements of VT-1 and VT-3 for the component Radiographic techniques, employing penetrating radi-
examinations being conducted. ation such as X-rays, gamma rays, or thermalized
neutrons, may be utilized with appropriate image-re-
cording devices, such as photographic film or papers,
IWA-2220 SURFACE EXAMINATION electrostatic systems, direct-image orthicons, or image
converters. For radiographic examinations employing
(a) A surface examination indicates the presence of
either X-ray equipment or radioactive isotopes and
surface discontinuities. It may be conducted by a mag-
photographic films, the procedure shall be as specified
netic particle, a liquid penetrant, or an eddy current
in Article 2 of Section V.
method.
(b) Any linear indication that exceeds the allowable
linear surface flaw standards shall be recorded. IWA-2232 Ultrasonic Examination
Ultrasonic examination shall be conducted in accord-
IWA-2221 Magnetic Particle Examination ance with Appendix I.
(a) Magnetic particle examination shall be conducted
in accordance with Section V, Article 7.
IWA-2233 Eddy Current Examination
(b) Magnetic particle examination of coated materials
shall be conducted in accordance with Section V, Article Eddy current examination shall be conducted in
7, Appendix I. accordance with Section V, Article 8, Appendix II.
16

IWA-2234 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
IWA-2234
A00 IWA-2234 Acoustic Emission Examination of IWB-3600 or IWC-3600, as applicable, continue the
two-month monitoring process described in (1) above.
Acoustic emission may be used in lieu of the succes-
(3) If the calculated flaw size at the end of the
sive inspections of IWB-2420(b) or IWC-2420(b) to
current inspection period does not meet the acceptance
monitor growth of flaws detected by other NDE meth-
criteria of IWB-3600 or IWC-3600, as applicable, the
ods. The flaws shall be sized by ultrasonic examination
following actions shall be performed.
in accordance with Appendix I, Supplement 12, prior (a) Calculate the flaw size at the end of the
to initiating use of acoustic emission. Acoustic emission next two-month time span. If this calculated flaw size
monitoring shall be initiated prior to resuming operation meets the acceptance criteria of IWB-3600 or IWC-
of the system. Acoustic emission shall be conducted 3600, as applicable, continue the two-month monitoring
in accordance with Section V, Article 13, with the process described in (1) above.
following additional requirements. (b) If the calculated flaw size at the end of the
(a) The following flaw growth calculation and accept- next two-month time span does not meet the acceptance
ance criteria shall be used. criteria of IWB-3600 or IWC-3600, as applicable, the
(1) Every two months during the current inspection component shall be corrected by repair/replacement
period, calculate the flaw growth in accordance with activity in accordance with IWB-3130 or IWC-3120,
Section V, Article 13, Appendix I. Using this growth as applicable.
rate, predict the flaw size at the end of the current (b) If no flaw growth is observed for one operating
inspection period. cycle, the component examination schedule may revert
(2) If the calculated flaw size at the end of the to the original schedule of successive inspections of
current inspection period meets the acceptance criteria IWB-2410 or IWC-2410, as applicable.
16.1

(1) Twenty to 40% of the questions shall cover tions and when recording data. These activities shall
fundamentals and principles of the method and shall be conducted under the guidance of Level II or Level
be similar to published ASNT Level III questions. III personnel. Level I personnel shall not evaluate or
(2) Thirty to 50% of the questions shall cover appli- accept the results of a nondestructive examination.
cations and establishment of procedures and techniques
and shall be similar to published ASNT Level III questions.
(3) Twenty to 30% of the questions shall cover IWA-2340 LEVEL III EDUCATION
the capability to interpret codes, standards, and specifi-
cations for the method. Level III candidates shall have high school or equiva-
(c) The Specific Examination shall contain at least lent education.
30 questions covering equipment, techniques, proce-
dures, and administration of the Employer’s written
practice. The Specific Examination shall also cover the IWA-2350 LIMITED CERTIFICATION 98
NDE requirements of this Division, including acceptance
standards and referenced codes and standards. Limited certification in a method is permitted for
(d) The Practical Examination shall be in accordance personnel who are restricted to performing examinations
with ANSI /ASNT CP-189 rules. of limited scope, i.e., limited operations or limited
(e) An ASNT Level III certificate with current en- techniques within the method. Topics that are not
dorsements obtained by examination for the applicable relevant to the limited certification may be deleted from
method satisfies the Basic and Method Examination the ANSI /ASNT CP-189, Appendix VI, or Appendix
requirements. VII training outline and may be accompanied by a
(f) When an outside agency administers the examina- corresponding reduction in training hours, examination
tion and only a pass or fail grade is issued, the Employer content, and number of examination questions. Only
shall assign a grade of 80% for a pass grade. questions related to the limited training are required.
(g) Level III personnel shall be recertified using the In addition, the required experience may be reduced
written Method, Specific, and Practical Examinations by a corresponding amount. The specific methods and
and the Demonstration Examination. Alternatively, techniques covered by limited certification and the
Level III personnel may be recertified using only the training, examination, and experience requirements for
written Method and Specific Examinations, provided limited certification shall be defined in the written
the following conditions are met: practice and documented in the individual’s certification
(1) The Level III candidate was previously certified records.
or recertified using all the written examinations and
the Demonstration Examination.
(2) The Level III candidate is not being recertified IWA-2360 LEVEL I AND LEVEL II
due to interrupted service as defined in the Employer’s TRAINING AND EXPERIENCE
written practice.
(a) A candidate may be qualified directly to Level
(3) The Level III candidate is not being certified
II with no time as a Level I provided the required
by a new Employer.
training and experience consists of the sum of the
(h) For initial certification, the grades for the Basic,
hours required for Level I and Level II certification.
Method, Specific, Practical, and Demonstration Exami-
(b) NDE training course outlines and materials shall
nations shall be averaged to determine the overall grade.
be approved by a Level III. Previous training and
For recertification, the grades of applicable examinations
administered in accordance with IWA-2323(g) shall be experience may be accepted if verified by a Level III.
averaged to determine the overall grade. The method of verification shall be documented in the
(i) An ACCP certificate with current endorsements candidate’s certification records.
obtained by examination satisfies the Basic Method,
Practical, and Demonstration examination requirements
for Level III NDE personnel. IWA-2370 LEVEL III EXPERIENCE
Candidates for Level III certification shall meet one
of the following criteria:
IWA-2330 LEVEL I RESPONSIBILITIES
(a) Graduate of a 4-year accredited engineering or
Level I personnel shall use written procedures when science college or university with a degree in engi-
performing specific setups, calibrations, and examina- neering or science, plus 1 year experience in NDE in
19

an assignment comparable to that of a Level II in the (3) identification of drawings showing items that
examination method. require examination;
(b) Completion with a passing grade of at least the (4) list of examination procedures;
equivalent of 2 full years of engineering or science (5) description of alternative examinations and
study at a university, college, or technical school, plus identification of components to be examined using
2 years experience in an assignment comparable to that alternative methods;
of a Level II in the examination method. (6) identification of calibration blocks used for
(c) Four years experience in an assignment compara- ultrasonic examination of components.
ble to that of a Level II in the examination method.
IWA-2425 INSPECTION PLAN AND A99

SCHEDULE SUPPORTING
IWA-2380 NDE INSTRUCTOR DOCUMENTS
NDE Instructors shall meet the requirements of Ap- Supporting documents necessary for inspection plan
pendix VII. and schedule implementation such as diagrams or system
drawings showing boundaries and system classifications,
procedures, specifications, and other documents required
for implementation of the inservice examinations and
IWA-2400 INSPECTION PROGRAM tests shall be available at the plant site.
IWA-2410 APPLICATION OF CODE EDITION

AND ADDENDA
IWA-2430 INSPECTION INTERVALS A00
The Code Edition and Addenda for preservice inspec-
(a) The inservice examinations and system pressure
tion and for initial and successive inservice inspection
tests required by IWB, IWC, IWD, IWE, and inservice
intervals shall be in accordance with 10CFR50, Section
examinations and tests of IWF shall be completed
50.55a.
during each of the inspection intervals for the service
lifetime of the plant. The inspections shall be performed
in accordance with the schedule of Inspection Program
A of IWA-2431, or optionally, Inspection Program B
A99 IWA-2420 INSPECTION PLANS AND
A00 of IWA-2432. It is not required that the inspection
SCHEDULES
intervals of IWB, IWC, IWD, IWE, and IWF conform
Inspection plans and schedules shall be prepared for to the same inspection program.
the preservice inspection, the first inservice inspection (b) The inspection interval shall be determined by
interval, and subsequent inservice inspection intervals. calendar years following placement of the plant into
(a) Each inspection plan shall include the following: commercial service.
(1) Inspection period and interval dates; (c) For components inspected under Program A, the
(2) the Edition and Addenda of this Division that following shall apply:
apply to the required examinations and tests; (1) Each inspection interval may be extended by
(3) the classification and identification of the com- as much as 1 year. The 2nd, 3rd, and 4th inspection
ponents subject to examination and test; intervals may be reduced by as much as 1 year.
(4) Code Cases proposed for use and the extent Adjustments shall not cause successive intervals to be
of their application. altered by more than 1 year from the original pattern
(b) An implementation schedule for performance of of intervals. No credit shall be given for examinations
examinations and tests shall be prepared for each inspec- conducted during the first year of commercial service.
tion plan. The schedule shall include the following: (2) That portion of an inspection interval described
(1) identification of the components selected for as an inspection period may be reduced or extended
examination and test, including successive exams from by as much as 1 year to enable an inspection to
prior periods; coincide with a plant outage. This adjustment shall not
(2) the Code requirements by examination category alter the rules and requirements for scheduling inspec-
and item number for each component and the examination intervals.
tion or test to be performed and the extent of the (d) For components inspected under Program B, the
examination or test; following shall apply:
20

(1) Each inspection interval may be reduced or by as much as one year to enable an inspection to
extended by as much as one year. Adjustments shall coincide with a plant outage. This adjustment shall
not cause successive intervals to be altered by more not alter the requirements for scheduling inspection
than one year from the original pattern of intervals. If intervals.
an inspection interval is extended, neither the start and (4) The inspection interval for which an examina-
end dates nor the inservice inspection program for the tion was performed shall be identified on examination
successive interval need be revised. records.
(2) Examinations may be performed to satisfy the (e) In addition to IWA-2430(c) and (d), for plants
requirements of the extended interval in conjunction that are out of service continuously for 6 months or
with examinations performed to satisfy the requirements more, the inspection interval during which the outage
of the successive interval. However, an examination occurred may be extended for a period equivalent to
performed to satisfy requirements of either the extended the outage and the original pattern of intervals extended
interval or the successive interval shall not be credited accordingly for successive intervals.
to both intervals. (f) The inspection intervals for items installed by
(3) That portion of an inspection interval described repair /replacement activities shall coincide with re-
as an inspection period may be reduced or extended maining intervals, as determined by the calendar years
20.1

of plant service at the time of the repair /replacement (e) Superseded Code Cases approved for use in
activities. accordance with IWA-2441(a) through (d) may continue
(g) The inspection program of IWA-2431 may be to be used.
replaced by the inspection program of IWA-2432, and (f) The use of any Code Case and revisions to
vice versa, during the first 3 years of the service lifetime previously approved Code Cases are subject to accept-
of the plant. ance by the regulatory and enforcement authorities
(h) The inspection intervals for inservice examination having jurisdiction at the plant site.
of heat exchanger tubing shall be in accordance with
the requirements of IWB-2413.
(i) The inspection intervals for inservice examination IWA-2442 Annulled Section XI Code Cases
of Class CC components shall be in accordance with
Code Cases approved for use in accordance with
the requirements of IWL-2400.
IWA-2441 may be used after annulment for the duration
of that Inspection Plan.
IWA-2431 Inspection Program A
The inspection intervals shall comply with the follow- IWA-2443 Code Cases for Other Sections
ing, except as may be modified by IWA-2430(c):
1st Inspection Interval — 3 years following initial start In the course of preparation.
of plant commercial service
2nd Inspection Interval — 7 years following the 1st
inspection interval IWA-2500 EXTENT OF EXAMINATION
3rd Inspection Interval — 13 years following the 2nd
inspection interval Requirements for examination of welds apply only to
4th Inspection Interval — 17 years following the 3rd welds joining items and not welds correcting flaws in base
inspection interval material (including core closure welds in casting), unless
Successive Inspection Intervals — follow IWA-2432 otherwise stated.
IWA-2432 Inspection Program B

IWA-2600 WELD REFERENCE SYSTEM
The inspection intervals shall comply with the follow-
ing, except as modified by IWA-2430(d): IWA-2610 GENERAL
1st Inspection Interval — 10 years following initial A reference system shall be established for all welds
start of plant commercial service and areas subject to surface or volumetric examination.
Successive Inspection Intervals — 10 years following Each such weld and area shall be located and identified
the previous inspection interval by a system of reference points. The system shall
permit identification of each weld, location of each
weld centerline, and designation of regular intervals
IWA-2440 APPLICATION OF CODE CASES along the length of the weld.
IWA-2441 Section XI Code Cases

(a) Code Cases to be used during a preservice or IWA-2620 PIPING
inservice inspection shall be identified in the Inspec-
tion Plan. Requirements for piping are provided in III-4300.
(b) Code Cases shall be applicable to the Edition The rules of III-4300 may also be applied to piping
and Addenda specified in the Inspection Plan. not within the scope of III-1100.
(c) Code Cases shall be in effect at the time the
Inspection Plan is filed with the regulatory and enforce-
ment authorities having jurisdiction at the plant site
IWA-2630 VESSELS
except as provided in IWA-2441(d).
(d) Code Cases issued subsequent to filing the Inspec- The requirements of Appendix A of Article 4 are
tion Plan may be proposed for use in amendments to acceptable for vessels examined in accordance with
the Inspection Plan. Article 4 of Section V.
21

IWA-2640 OTHER COMPONENTS (b) Longitudinal (Vertical) Welds. Longitudinal welds

shall be laid out from the center line of circumferential
A reference system for component welds is given
welds at the top end of the weld. The examination
in IWA-2641. A different system may be used provided
surface shall be identified as clockwise or counterclock-
it meets the requirements of IWA-2610. wise as viewed from the top of the component.
(c) Nozzle-to-Vessel Welds. The external reference
circle shall have a sufficient whole number of inches
radius so that the circle falls on the vessel external
IWA-2641 Layout of Component Reference surface beyond the weld fillet. The internal reference
Points circle shall have a sufficient whole number of inches
radius so that the circle falls within 1⁄2 in. (13 mm)
The layout of the weld shall consist of placing of the weld centerline. Zero deg. point on the weld
reference points on the center line of the weld. The shall be the top of the nozzle. The 0 deg. point for
standard spacing of the reference points shall be 12 welds of nozzles centered in heads shall be located at
in. (305 mm). All points shall be identified with their the 0 deg. axis of the vessel. Angular layout of the
numbers: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, etc. The numbers of points, weld shall be made clockwise on the external surface,
distance apart, and starting point shall be recorded on counterclockwise on the internal surface. Zero, 90, 180,
the reporting form. The weld center line shall be the and 270 deg. lines shall be marked on all nozzle welds
divider for the two examination surfaces. examined; 30 deg. increment lines shall be marked on
(a) Circumferential (Girth) Welds. The standard start- nozzle welds greater than 4 in. (102 mm) radius; 15
ing point shall be component 0 deg. The reference deg. increment lines shall be marked on nozzle welds
points shall be numbered clockwise as viewed from greater than 12 in. (305 mm) radius; 5 deg. increment
the top of the component. The examination surfaces lines shall be marked on nozzle welds greater than 24
shall be identified as above or below the weld. in. (610 mm) radius.
22

ARTICLE IWA-4000
REPAIR /REPLACEMENT ACTIVITIES
IWA-4100 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1400(a) as Code Class 1, 2, 3, MC, or CC, and their
associated supports.
A99 IWA-4110 SCOPE
(b) The requirements of this Article do not apply
(a) The requirements of this Article apply regardless to the following, except as provided in IWA-4120(c)
of the reason for the repair /replacement activity1 or through (g):
the method that detected the condition requiring the (1) valve operators, controllers, position indicators,
repair /replacement activity. pump impellers, pump drivers, or other accessories and
(b) This Article provides requirements for repair / devices unless they have been classified as Code Class
replacement activities1 associated with pressure re- 1, 2, or 3 pressure retaining items in accordance with
taining components and their supports, including appur- IWA-1320;
tenances, subassemblies, parts of a component, core (2) instruments or permanently-sealed, fluid-filled
support structures, metal containments and their integral tubing systems furnished with instruments, but do apply
attachments, and metallic portions of Class CC contain- to instrument, control, and sampling piping when classi-
ments and their integral attachments. Repair /replace- fied as Code Class 1, 2, or 3 in accordance with
ment activities include welding, brazing, defect removal, IWA-1320;
and removing, adding, and modifying items or systems. (3) rupture disk material (the requirements of this
These requirements are applicable to procurement, de- Article do apply to the portion of a rupture disk holder
sign, installation, examination, and pressure testing of that forms the pressure boundary);
items within the scope of this Division. (4) orifice plates not exceeding 1⁄2 in. nominal
(c) This Article provides requirements for repair / thickness that are used only in flow-measuring service;
replacement activities performed on concrete contain- (5) other than component supports or core supports,
ments and post-tensioning system items for concrete material that is not associated with the pressure retaining
containments as specified in IWL-4000. function of a component, such as shafts, stems, trim,
spray nozzles, bearings, bushings, springs, wear plates,
IWA-4120 Applicability seals, packing, gaskets, valve seats, and ceramic insulat-
ing material and special alloys used as seal material
(a) The requirements of this Article apply to items in electrical penetration assemblies;
classified by the Owner in accordance with IWA- (6) component support items such as gaskets, seals,
bushing, springs, compression spring end plates, bear-
1 The term repair /replacement activity includes those activities pre- ings, retaining rings, washers, wear shoes, shims, slide
viously known as repair, replacement, modification, or alteration.
Those previous terms no longer have a unique meaning or significance plates, and hydraulic fluids. Requirements, if any, for
and are combined in the term repair /replacement activity. Reasons these items shall be stated in the Owner’s Requirements.
for repair /replacement activities may include the following: (c) When repair /replacement activities are performed
(a) discrepancies detected during inservice inspection, maintenance,
or service on items identified in IWA-4120(b), the Owner shall
(b) regulatory requirements change determine if installation of these items affects any
(c) design changes to improve equipment service inspection or test required by IWA-4530.
(d) changes to improve reliability
(e) damage (d) If items in IWA-4120(b)(6) are replaced in snub-
(f ) failure during service bers, the snubbers shall be examined and tested in
(g) personnel exposure accordance with IWA-4530.
(h) economics
(i) end of service life (e) If items identified in IWA-4120(b) require weld-
(j) addition of new items or systems ing to the pressure retaining portion of a component
35

or to a component support such installation shall comply of IWA-4142 and the technical requirements of IWA-
with the requirements of this Article. 4400 and IWA-4520. A Repair /Replacement Plan, pres-
(f) Applicable Construction Code requirements, such sure testing, services of an Authorized Inspection
as design requirements for Class 1 valve stems, Owner Agency, and completion of NIS-2 forms are not re-
responsibilities for assuring adequacy of intervening quired.
elements in the component support load path, and (c) If an item to be subjected to a repair /replacement
nondestructive examination of springs for Class 1 com- activity does not satisfy the requirements of this Divi-
ponent supports, shall be met for items identified in sion, the evaluation and corrective provisions of IWA-
IWA-4120(b). 4160 apply.
(g) Appendix J provides guidance in determining (d) The tests of IWA-4530(b) shall be performed
applicability of this Article. for repair /replacement activities of affecting snubber
performance parameters. (Note: Repair/replacement ac-
tivities could affect OM-Code-required pump or valve
IWA-4130 ALTERNATIVE REQUIREMENTS performance parameters.)
(e) Use of these alternative requirements, including
IWA-4131 Small Items
specifying the size of Class 1 items to which
IWA-4131.1 Applicability. When repair /replacement these requirements will be applied, shall be docu-
activities involve the following items, the alternative mented by the Owner in the Repair/Replacement
requirements of IWA-4131.2 may be used. program.
(a) Class 1 piping, tubing (except heat exchanger
tubing, and sleeves and welded plugs used for heat
IWA-4132 Items Rotated From Stock A00
exchanger tubing), valves, fittings, and associated
supports, no larger than the smaller of (1) or (2) For snubbers and pressure relief valves6
rotated from
below: stock and installed on components (including piping
(1) NPS 1 (DN25); or systems), the following requirements may be used in
(2) the size and design such that, in the event lieu of those of IWA-4000, provided the rotation is
of postulated failure during normal plant operating only for testing the removed items:
conditions, the reactor can be shut down and cooled (a) Items being removed and installed shall be of
in an orderly manner, assuming makeup is provided the same design and construction.
by normal reactor coolant makeup systems operable (b) Items being removed shall have no evidence of
from on-site emergency power. failure at the time of removal.
(b) Class 2 and 3 piping, tubing (except heat ex- (c) Items being rotated shall be removed and installed
changer tubing, and sleeves and welded plugs used for only by mechanical means.
heat exchanger tubing), valves, and fittings, NPS 1 (d) Items being installed shall previously have been
(DN25) and smaller, and associated supports. in service.
(e) Preservice inspections and pressure tests shall be
A00 IWA-4131.2 Requirements. For repair /replacement
performed as required by IWA-4500.
activities involving items identified in IWA-4131.1, the
(f) The Owner shall track the items to ensure trace-
following requirements may be used in lieu of those
ability of inservice inspection and testing records.
of IWA-4000.
(g) Use of an NIS-2 form is not required.
(a) Items shall be procured in accordance with the
(h) Testing of removed snubbers, including required
requirements of IWA-4142 and the technical require-
sample expansions, shall be performed in accordance
ments of IWA-4200. For Section III items, the require-
with Subsection IWF.
ments of NA-3700 or NCA-3800 need not be met,
provided the Owner’s Quality Assurance Program
provides measures to assure that material is furnished IWA-4133 Mechanical Clamping Devices Used as
in accordance with the material specification and Piping Pressure Boundary
the applicable material requirements of Section III. A
Mechanical clamping devices used to replace piping
Repair /Replacement Plan, possession of a Certifi-
pressure boundary shall meet the requirements of Ap-
cate of Authorization, and an agreement with an Author-
pendix IX.
ized Inspection Agency are not required for the
organization constructing or fabricating these items. 6 Testing
requirements for pressure relief valves can be found in the
(b) Repair /replacement activities shall be performed ASME Code for Operation and Maintenance of Nuclear Power Plants
and documented in accordance with the requirements (OM Code).
36

IWA-4140 RESPONSIBILITIES 4142. These provisions may not be used to manufacture

complete pumps, valves, vessels, or tanks.
IWA-4141 Owner’s Responsibilities
(b) Application of the ASME NA symbol stamp is
It is the responsibility of the Owner to provide or neither required nor prohibited for installation.
cause to be provided the following:
(a) Repair /Replacement Program and Plans required
by IWA-4150;
IWA-4150 REPAIR / REPLACEMENT A00
(b) specification requirements for repair /replacement
PROGRAM AND PLAN
activities.
(a) Repair /replacement activities shall be completed
in accordance with the Repair /Replacement Program.
IWA-4142 Repair /Replacement Organization’s
The Program is a document or set of documents that
Quality Assurance Program
defines the managerial and administrative control for
(a) The organization that performs repair /replace- completion of repair /replacement activities.
ment activities shall establish a Quality Assurance (b) The Edition and Addenda of Section XI used
Program for control of their activities in accordance for the Repair /Replacement Program shall correspond
with the Repair /Replacement Program and Plans. The with the Edition and Addenda identified in the inservice
Quality Assurance Program shall comply with either inspection program applicable to the inspection interval.
of the following: Alternatively, later Editions and Addenda of Section
(1) IWA-1400(n), when the Owner is the Repair / XI, or specific provisions within an Edition or Addenda
Replacement Organization. later than those specified in the Owner’s Inservice
(2) When the Repair /Replacement Organization is Inspection Program may be used. When provisions
other than the Owner, the Repair /Replacement Organi- of later Editions and Addenda are used, all related
zation’s Quality Assurance Program shall be docu- requirements shall be met. The later Edition and Ad-
mented and shall comply with the applicable quality denda shall have been accepted by the enforcement
assurance program criteria of 10CFR50 Appendix B and regulatory authorities having jurisdiction at the
supplemented as necessary to be consistent with the plant site.
Owner’s Quality Assurance Program; NQA-1, Parts II (c) A Repair /Replacement Plan shall be prepared
and III, Basic Requirements and Supplements; or NCA- in accordance with the Repair /Replacement Program
4000. The Repair /Replacement Organization’s Quality whenever a repair /replacement activity is to be per-
Assurance Program shall be documented in sufficient formed. Repair /Replacement Plans shall include the
detail for the Owner to assure that the requirements essential requirements for completion of the repair/
of this Article will be met for the activities to be replacement activities. Repair /Replacement Plans are
performed. The program shall be reviewed and accepted not required for the design phase of a repair /replacement
by the Owner. activity, including repair /replacement activities that re-
(b) When the performance of repair /replacement ac- quire design only. A Repair/Replacement Plan shall
tivities is split between the Owner and a Repair / identify the following:
Replacement Organization, each organization’s Quality (1) applicable Code Edition, Addenda, and Cases
Assurance Program shall comply with IWA-4142(a)(1) of Section XI;
or (a)(2) for their respective activities. The Owner (2) Construction Code Edition, Addenda, Cases,
shall be responsible for establishing interfaces and for and Owner’s Requirements used for the following:
assuring that the requirements of this Article are met (a) construction of the item to be affected by
by the combination of the two Quality Assurance the repair /replacement activity
Programs. (b) construction of the item to be installed by
the repair /replacement activity
(c) performance of the repair /replacement activ-
IWA-4143 Stamping
ities
(a) Application of the ASME NPT symbol is neither (3) The following items, when applicable to the spe-
required nor prohibited for the fabrication of parts, cific repair/replacement activity, shall be documented.
appurtenances, piping subassemblies, and supports to (a) a description of any defect(s) and nondestruc-
be used by the Owner when performed at the Owner’s tive examination methods used to detect those defect(s)
facilities by a Repair/Replacement Organization with (b) the defect(s) removal method, the method
a quality assurance program that complies with IWA- of measurement of the cavity created by removing a
37

defect(s), and, when required by IWA-2600, require- (1) Design Specification

ments for reference points (2) Design Report
(c) the applicable weld procedure, heat treat- (3) Overpressure Protection Report
ment, nondestructive examination, tests, and material (4) Manufacturer’s Data Report
requirements (5) Material Certification
(d) the applicable examination, test, and accept- (6) Evaluation required by IWA-4160 or IWA-
ance criteria to be used to verify acceptability 4311
(4) description of the repair/replacement activities (7) Repair /Replacement Program and Plans
to be performed; (8) Reconciliation documentation
(5) intended life of the item after completion of (c) Revisions or updates to existing reports, records,
the repair /replacement activity, when less than the and specifications shall be traceable to and from the
remainder of the previous design life of the item; original record or report to provide a record of the
(6) whether application of the ASME Code Symbol current status of the item. The review and certification
Stamp is required in accordance with IWA-4143; requirements for these revisions or updates shall be in
(7) documentation in accordance with IWA-4180 accordance with the Owner’s Requirements and the
and IWA-6000. Construction Code.
(d) The Repair /Replacement Program, Plans, and (d) Form NIS-2 shall be completed for all repair /
evaluations required by IWA-4160 shall be subject to replacement activities.
review by enforcement and regulatory authorities having
jurisdiction at the plant site.
IWA-4200 ITEMS FOR REPAIR/
REPLACEMENT ACTIVITIES
A00 IWA-4160 VERIFICATION OF
ACCEPTABILITY IWA-4210 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
If an item does not satisfy the requirements of this In course of preparation.
Division, the Owner shall determine the cause of unac-
ceptability. Prior to returning the item to service the
Owner shall evaluate the suitability of the item subjected IWA-4220 CODE APPLICABILITY
to the repair /replacement activity. If the requirements for
the original item are determined to be deficient, appro- IWA-4221 Construction Code and Owner’s A00
priate corrective provisions shall be included in the Own- Requirements
er’s Requirements and Design Specification, as applica- (a) An item to be used for repair /replacement activi-
ble. The report of the evaluation shall be made part of ties shall meet the applicable Owner’s Requirements.
the record (IWA-4180). Alternatively, revised Owner’s Requirements may be
used, provided they are reconciled in accordance with
IWA-4222. Reconciliation documentation shall be pre-
IWA-4170 INSPECTION pared.
The services of an Authorized Inspection Agency (b) An item to be used for repair/replacement activi-
shall be used. The Owner shall notify the Authorized ties shall meet the Construction Code specified in
Inspection Agency prior to starting a repair /replacement accordance with (1), (2), or (3) below.
activity and keep the Inspector informed of progress (1) When replacing an existing item, the new item
so that necessary inspections may be performed. shall meet the Construction Code to which the original
item was constructed.
(2) When adding a new item to an existing system,
the Owner shall specify a Construction Code that is
A00 IWA-4180 DOCUMENTATION
no earlier than the earliest Constrution Code used for
(a) The reports and records required by IWA-6000 construction of any originally installed item in that
shall be completed for all repair /replacement activities. system.
(b) The following reports and records shall, to the (3) When adding a new system, the Owner shall
extent required by the Construction Code, Owner’s specify a Construction Code that is no earlier than the
Requirements, and this Article, be maintained by the earliest Construction Code used for other systems that
Owner, as applicable: perform a similar function.
38

IWA-4221 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS IWA-4224.3
(c) As an alternative to (b) above, the item may (b) An earlier Edition and Addenda of the same
meet all or portions of the requirements of different Construction Code may be used, provided all technical
Editions and Addenda of the Construction Code, or requirements of the earlier Construction Code are recon-
Section III when the Construction Code was not Section ciled.
III, provided the requirements of IWA-4222 through
IWA-4226, as applicable, are met. Construction Code
IWA-4224 Reconciliation of Material
Cases may also be used. Reconciliations required by
this Article shall be documented. All or portions of IWA-4224.1 Identical Material Procured to a Later
later different Construction Codes may be used as listed Edition or Addenda of the Construction Code, Sec-
below: tion III, or Material Specification
(1) Piping, piping subassemblies, and their sup- (a) Materials, including welding materials, may meet
ports: B31.1 to B31.7 to Section III. the requirements of later dates of issue of the material
(2) Pumps, valves, and their supports: from B31.1 specification and later Editions and Addenda of the
to Draft Code for Pumps and Valves for Nuclear Power same Construction Code or Section III when the Con-
to Section III. struction Code was not Section III, provided the materi-
(3) Vessels and their supports: Section VIII to als are the same specification, grade, type, class, or
Section III. alloy, and heat-treated condition, as applicable.
(4) Atmospheric and 0-15 psig (0–103 kPa) storage (b) Differences in the specified material tensile and
tanks and their supports: Section VIII, API 620, or yield strength shall be compared and evaluated. If the
API 650 to Section III. replacement material has a lower strength, a comparison
shall be made of the allowable stresses. If the tensile
or yield strength is reduced and allowable stresses are
A00 IWA-4222 Reconciliation of Code and Owner’s reduced, the effect of the reduction on the design shall
Requirements be reconciled. For welding materials, any reduction in
specified tensile strength shall be evaluated to ensure
(a) Code Requirements and Owner’s Requirements
that the strength of the filler metal meets or exceeds
may be technical or administrative.
the strength of the base materials.
(1) Only technical requirements that could affect
materials, design, fabrication, or examination, and affect IWA-4224.2 Identical Material Procured to an A00
the pressure boundary, or core support or component Earlier Construction Code Edition or Addenda or
support function, need to be reconciled. Material Specification
(2) Administrative requirements, i.e., those that do (a) Materials, including welding materials, may meet
not affect the pressure boundary or core support or the requirements of earlier dates of issue of the material
component support function, need not be reconciled.7 specification and earlier Editions and Addenda of the
Examples of such requirements include quality assur- same Construction Code, provided the materials are
ance, certification, Code Symbol Stamping, Data Re- the same specification, grade, type, class, or alloy, and
ports, and Authorized Inspection. heat-treated condition, as applicable.
(b) The administrative requirements of either the (b) Differences in the specified material tensile and
Construction Code of the item being replaced or the yield strength shall be compared and evaluated. If the
Construction Code of the item to be used for replacement replacement material has a lower strength, a comparison
shall be met. shall be made of the allowable stresses. If the tensile
or yield strength is lower and allowable stresses are
lower, the effect of the reduction on the design shall
A99 IWA-4223 Reconciliation of Components be reconciled. For welding materials, a lower specified
tensile strength shall be evaluated to ensure that the
(a) Reconciliation of later Editions or Addenda of
strength of the filler metal meets or exceeds the strength
the Construction Codes or alternative Codes as permitted
of the base materials.
by IWA-4221 is not required. The Owner shall evaluate
(c) Material examination and testing requirements
any changes in weight, configuration, or pressure-tem-
from the Construction Code of the item shall be met.
perature rating in accordance with IWA-4311.
IWA-4224.3 Use of a Different Material A00
7 This
(a) Use of materials of a specification, grade, type,
provision does not negate the requirement to implement the
Owner’s QA Program, nor does it affect Owner commitments to class, or alloy, and heat-treated condition, other than
regulatory and enforcement authorities. that originally specified, shall be evaluated for suitability
39

IWA-4224.3 1998 SECTION XI, DIVISION 1 IWA-4321
for the specified design and operating conditions in beyond the design-related issues defined in IWA-4223,
accordance with IWA-4311. IWA-4224, and IWA-4225, shall be performed.
(b) Material examination and testing requirements (a) Material, fabrication, and examination require-
shall be reconciled to the Construction Code requirements (e.g., NX-2000, NX-4000, and NX-5000 of Sec-
ments of the item. tion III) shall be reviewed to reconcile the details
applicable to design with the design of the replace-
IWA-4224.4 Substitution of Material Specifications ment item.
(a) When an SA or SB Specification is identified (b) All requirements related to the later portions shall
as being identical, or identical except for editorial be met, or any differences between the later design
differences, to the corresponding ASTM A or B Specifi- provisions and the previous design shall be reconciled.
cation, either specification may be used.
(b) When an SFA Specification is identified as being
identical, or identical except for editorial differences, IWA-4300 DESIGN
to the corresponding AWS specification, either specifi-
cation may be used. IWA-4310 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
IWA-4311 Material, Design, or Configuration
Changes
IWA-4225 Reconciliation of Parts,
Appurtenances, and Piping When a change is made to the design or configuration
Subassemblies of an item or system, including material substitution,
the change shall meet the following requirements:
(a) Parts, appurtenances, and piping subassemblies (a) When an analysis is available, the change shall
may be fabricated to later Editions and Addenda of be evaluated to determine if a reanalysis is required.
the Construction Code and later different Construction If no reanalysis is performed, an evaluation shall be
Codes, as permitted by IWA-4221(b), provided materials performed and documented. The evaluation or reanalysis
are reconciled in accordance with IWA-4224. The shall document that the proposed change meets the
Owner shall evaluate any changes in weight, configura- Owner’s Requirements, and the Construction Code or
tion, or pressure-temperature rating in accordance with alternative provisions of this Division. The evaluation
IWA-4311. or reanalysis shall be traceable in accordance with
(b) An earlier Edition and Addenda of the same IWA-4180(c).
Construction Code may be used, provided all technical (b) When an analysis is unavailable (e.g., proprietary
requirements of the original Construction Code of the design, standard B16.5 flanges or fittings, standard
component being replaced are met, except as permitted B16.34 valve), an evaluation or a new analysis shall
by IWA-4224. Failure to meet the technical requirements be performed to document that the proposed change
of the original Construction Code may not be accepted meets the Owner’s Requirements and the Construction
by reconciliation. Code or alternative provisions of this Division. The
evaluation or new analysis shall be maintained in the
same manner as a Design Report in accordance with
IWA-4226 Reconciliation of Design Requirements IWA-4180(b) and IWA-4311(a).
IWA-4226.1 Design to All Requirements of a Later (c) Analyses shall be reviewed and certified in ac-
Edition or Addenda of the Construction Code. When cordance with the requirements of the Construction
an item is designed to all requirements of a later Code and Owner’s Requirements. Evaluations shall be
Edition or Addenda of the Construction Code, or Section certified as required for analyses.
III when the Construction Code was not Section III, (d) For any design or configuration change that devi-
reconciliation beyond the design-related issues defined ates from the Owner’s Requirements, Design Specifica-
in IWA-4223, IWA-4224, and IWA-4225 is not re- tion, or Design Report, the affected documents shall
quired. be revised or updated in accordance with IWA-4180(c).
A99
IWA-4226.2 Design to Portions of the Require-
ments of a Later Edition or Addenda of the Construc- IWA-4320 PIPING
tion Code. When an item is designed to portions of
IWA-4321 Class 1 Mechanical Joints
the requirements of a later Edition or Addenda of the
Construction Code, or Section III when the Construction (a) Flanged joints may be used in Class 1 piping
Code was not Section III, the following reconciliation systems.
40

(b) Expanded joints shall not be used in Class 1 as practical to the original nameplate. This nameplate
piping systems. shall contain the revised ratings and a reference to the
(c) Threaded joints in which the threads provide the rerating documentation.
only seal shall not be used in Class 1 piping systems. (f) An ASME Certificate of Authorization is not
If a seal weld is employed as the sealing medium, the required.
stress analysis of the joint shall include the stresses in
the weld resulting from the relative deflections of the
mated parts. IWA-4332 Flaw Evaluation A99
(d) Flared, flareless, and compression-type tubing
Inservice flaws that were previously evaluated and
fittings may be used for tubing sizes not exceeding 1
accepted by the analytical evaluation provisions of
in. O.D. within the limitations of applicable standards
IWB-3000, IWC-3000, or IWE-3000, or known wall
and requirements of IWA-4321(d)(2) and (3). In the
thinning, shall be evaluated or analyzed in accordance
absence of such standards or specifications, the Owner
with IWA-4311.
shall determine that the type of fitting selected is
adequate and safe for the Design Conditions in accord-
ance with the following requirements.
(1) The fitting pressure-temperature ratings shall IWA-4333 Examination A99
be reconciled with the specified design and operating If rerating results in a design condition for which the
conditions. Construction Code or Owner’s Requirements requires a
(2) Fittings and their joints shall be suitable for different examination than was originally performed,
the tubing with which they are to be used, in accordance that examination shall be performed.
with the minimum wall thickness of the tubing and
method of assembly recommended by the manufacturer.
(3) Fittings shall not be used in services that IWA-4334 Pressure Test Requirements A99
exceed the manufacturer’s maximum pressure-tempera-
ture recommendations. Rerated items shall be subjected to a system leakage
test in accordance with IWA-5000 for the new service
condition if the resulting test pressure would be higher
than the pressure of previous pressure tests.
A99 IWA-4330 RERATING
The provisions of this paragraph shall apply for
rerating whether or not there is accompanying physi-
cal work. IWA-4340 MITIGATION OF DEFECTS BY A00
MODIFICATION
Modification of items may be performed to contain
A99 IWA-4331 General Requirements
or isolate a defective area without removal of the
(a) The applicable design requirements of the Con- defect, provided the following requirements are met.
struction Code and Owner’s Requirements shall be met. (a) The defect shall be characterized using nonde-
Later Editions and Addenda of the Construction Code structive examination and evaluated to determine its
or a later, different Construction Code, either in its cause and projected growth.
entirety or portions thereof, and Code Cases may be (b) The modification shall provide for the structural
used, provided the requirements of IWA-4221 are met. integrity of the item such that it no longer relies on
(b) Overpressure protection shall be evaluated in the defective area, including projected growth. The
accordance with the Construction Code and Owner’s modification shall meet the Construction Code and
Requirements. Owner’s Requirements for the item in accordance with
(c) The rerating shall be evaluated or analyzed in IWA-4220.
accordance with IWA-4311. The Owner’s Requirements (c) In lieu of reexamination of the defective area in
shall be reviewed and revised or updated when nec- accordance with IWA-4530(a), the Owner shall prepare
essary. a plan for additional examinations to detect propagation
(d) Form NIS-2 shall be completed for the rerating. of the flaw beyond the limits of the modification, and
(e) If a nameplate with pressure or temperature rating when practicable, to validate the projected growth.
is attached to the item or piping system, the Owner The frequency and method of examination shall be
or his designee shall attach a new nameplate as close determined by the Owner.
41

IWA-4400 1998 SECTION XI, DIVISION 1 IWA-4422.2.2
A99 IWA-4400 WELDING, BRAZING, DEFECT IWA-4422 Defect Removal and Examination
REMOVAL, AND IWA-4422.1 Defect Removal A99
INSTALLATION (a) The defect removal process shall be in accordance
A99 IWA-4410 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS with IWA-4421, except that thermal removal processes
shall be in accordance with IWA-4460. A defect is
(a) Welding, brazing, defect removal, and installation considered removed when it has been reduced to an
activities shall be performed in accordance with IWA- acceptable size. The component shall be acceptable for
4420 or IWA-4430, and the other requirements of this continued service if the resulting section thickness
Subarticle, except that the requirements of IWA-4700 created by the cavity is at least the minimum required
shall be used for heat exchanger tube plugging or thickness. If the resulting section thickness is less than
sleeving. the minimum required thickness, the component shall be
(b) Welding electrodes, flux, and other welding mate- corrected by repair/replacement activities in accordance
rial shall be stored and handled in accordance with a with this Article.
written procedure. Absorption of moisture by fluxes (b) Alternatively, the defect removal area and any
and cored, fabricated, or coated electrodes shall be remaining portion of the defect may be evaluated
minimized. When electrode storage and baking condi- and the component accepted in accordance with the
tions are not specified by this Division, the precautions appropriate flaw evaluation provisions of Section XI,
and recommendations of the electrode manufacturer or the design provisions of the Owner’s Requirements
shall be followed. Alternative welding material control and either the Construction Code or Section III.
procedures may be used if accepted by the Inspector.
(c) Procedures for welding material control shall be IWA-4422.2 Nondestructive Examination
included in the Repair /Replacement Program.
IWA-4422.2.1 Defect Removal Without Welding
or Brazing
(a) After removal of defects detected by visual or
surface examination, surface examination of the defect
removal area shall be performed.
(b) After removal of defects detected by volumetric
examination, volumetric examination of the defect re-
IWA-4420 CONSTRUCTION CODE moval area shall be performed. The volumetric examina-
REQUIREMENTS tion method that detected the defect shall be used.
A99 IWA-4421 Construction Code and Owner’s (c) The acceptance criteria of either the Construction
A00 Requirements Code or Section XI shall be met.
(d) Indications detected as a result of excavation that
(a) Welding, brazing, defect removal, and installation are not associated with the defect being removed shall
activities shall be performed in accordance with the be evaluated for acceptability in accordance with the
Owner’s Requirements and the Construction Code of Construction Code or Section XI.
the component or system, except as provided in (b)
and (c) below. The requirements of IWA-4460 shall IWA-4422.2.2 Defect Removal Followed by
be used in lieu of Construction Code requirements for Welding or Brazing
mechanical and thermal metal removal. The require- (a) Surface examination of the defect removal area
ments of IWA-4422 shall be used in lieu of Construction is required prior to welding, except as provided below.
Code requirements for examination of defect re- (1) A surface examination is not required when
moval areas. the defect is eliminated by removing the full cross-
(b) Later Editions and Addenda of the Construction section of the weld or base material.
Code or a later different Construction Code, either in (2) When surface examination of the excavation
its entirety or portions thereof, and Code Cases may cannot be performed or will not provide meaningful
be used, provided the substitution is as listed in IWA- results, surface examination of the excavation is not
4221(c). Filler material requirements shall be reconciled, required. The acceptability of any remaining portion
as required, in accordance with IWA-4224. of the defect may be established by evaluation in
(c) Revised Owner’s Requirements may be used, accordance with IWA-4422.1(b) in lieu of the surface
provided they are reconciled in accordance with examination. Alternative NDE methods may be used
IWA-4222. to characterize any remaining portion of the defect.
42

IWA-4422.2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS IWA-4451.1
(3) If final volumetric examination will be per- cable to welding. Each WPS shall be supported by all
formed on the completed repair, the final volumetric necessary PQRs.
examination method is the same as the method used (5) The Owner accepting the completed PQR shall
to detect the defect, and the volume to be examined accept responsibility for the PQR by documenting the
includes the location of the original defect, surface Owner’s approval of each WPS that references the PQR.
examination of the defect removal area is not required. (6) The Owner accepting the completed PQR shall
(b) The acceptance criteria of either the Construction demonstrate technical competence in application of the
Code or Section XI shall be used for the excavation. received PQR by completing a performance qualification
(c) Surface examination of defect removal areas is using the parameters of a resulting WPS.
not required for brazed joints. (7) The Owner may accept and use a PQR only
(d) Indications detected as a result of excavation that when it is received directly from the Owner that certified
are not associated with the defect being removed shall the PQR.
be evaluated for acceptability in accordance with the (c) All welders shall be qualified by the Repair /
Construction Code or Section XI. Replacement Organization in accordance with the
(e) Examination following welding or brazing shall requirements of the codes specified in the
be in accordance with IWA-4520. Repair /Replacement Plan.
(d) Welders need not be employed directly by the
Repair /Replacement Organization, provided the use of
such welders is controlled by the Quality Assurance
IWA-4430 ALTERNATIVES TO
Program of the Repair /Replacement Organization. This
CONSTRUCTION CODE
Program shall include the following:
REQUIREMENTS
(1) requirements for complete and exclusive ad-
In lieu of the requirements of IWA-4420, the require- ministration and technical supervision of all welders
ments of IWA-4600 may be used for alternative welding by the Repair /Replacement Organization;
methods. (2) requirements for contractual control that pro-
vides the necessary authority to assign and remove
welders at the discretion of the Repair /Replacement
Organization;
IWA-4440 WELDING AND WELDER
(3) evidence that the Quality Assurance Program is
QUALIFICATION (INCLUDING
acceptable to the Owner’s Authorized Nuclear Inservice
WELDING OPERATORS)
Inspector.
(a) All welding shall be performed in accordance
with Welding Procedure Specifications that have been
qualified by the Owner or Repair /Replacement Organi-
zation in accordance with the requirements of the codes IWA-4450 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION
specified in the Repair /Replacement Plan. Fittings shall be installed in accordance with the
(b) As an alternative to QW-201, a procedure qualifi- manufacturer’s recommendations.
cation record (PQR) qualified by one Owner may be
used by another Owner. When this alternative is used,
the following requirements shall be met:
IWA-4451 Helical-Coil Threaded Inserts
(1) The Owner who performed the procedure quali-
fication test shall certify, by signing the PQR, that IWA-4451.1 Class 1, 2, and 3. Internal threads in A00
testing was performed in accordance with Section IX. pressure-retaining items may be replaced with helical-
(2) The Owner who performed the procedure quali- coil threaded inserts in accordance with the following
fication test shall certify, in writing, that the procedure requirements.
qualification was conducted in accordance with a Quality (a) Helical-coil threaded inserts shall satisfy the de-
Assurance Program that satisfies the requirements of sign requirements of the Construction Code for the
IWA-1400. specified loading to be applied to the threaded connec-
(3) The Owner accepting the completed PQR shall tion. For materials not listed in the Construction Code,
be responsible for obtaining any additional supporting primary stresses shall not exceed the lesser of 2⁄3 of
information needed for WPS development. the minimum specified yield strength or 1⁄4 of the
(4) The Owner accepting the completed PQR shall minimum specified tensile strength of the applicable
document, on each resulting WPS, the parameters appli- material.
43

IWA-4451.1 1998 SECTION XI, DIVISION 1 IWA-4461.2
(b) Helical-coil threaded inserts shall be purchased gration machining (MDM), and electrodischarge ma-
in accordance with the Owner’s or Repair/Replacement chining (EDM).
Organizations’s Quality Assurance program meeting the
IWA-4461.1 P-No.1. When thermal removal pro-
requirements of IWA-4142.
cesses are used on P-No. 1 materials, surface oxides
(c) Helical-coil threaded inserts shall be supplied
shall be removed by mechanical processing prior to
with a Certified Material Test Report that provides
welding on cut surfaces.
traceability to the item, material specification, chemical
composition, grade or class, and mechanical properties IWA-4461.2 P-Nos. 3, 4, 5A, 5B, 5C, 6, 7, 9A, A99
and heat-treated condition prior to final forming. 9B, 9C, 10A, 10B, 10C, 10E Through 10K, and 11A
(d) Helical-coil threaded inserts shall be installed in Materials
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. (a) When preheat is less than that specified in Table
IWA-4461.1-1, material shall be removed by a mechani-
IWA-4460 METAL REMOVAL PROCESSES

IWA-4461 Thermal Removal Processes
Thermal removal processes include oxyacetylene cut-
ting, carbon arc gouging, plasma cutting, metal disinte-
43.1

A99 TABLE IWA-4461.1-1

MINIMUM PREHEAT TEMPERATURE, °F
P-Nos. 10A,
P-No. 4 and P-Nos. 5A, 10B, 10C, and
P-No. 1 P-No. 1 (Group 3), P-Nos. 9A, 5B, 5C, and 10E Through
(Groups 1 and 2) P-No. 3, and P-No. 11A 9B, and 9C P-No. 6 P-No. 7 10K
200 [Note (1)] 200 250 300 None 200 [Note (1)]
required
NOTE:
(1) Applies only to material with a nominal section thickness of 3⁄4 in. and greater.
cal method from all thermally processed areas, in (e) Corrosion testing of the thermally cut surface
accordance with the following: and heat affected zone shall be performed if the cut
(1) When welding is to be performed, at least surface is to be exposed to corrosive media. Alterna-
1/32 in. of material shall be removed from the cavity tively, corrosion resistance of the thermally cut surface
to be welded. may be evaluated. The Owner shall specify the accept-
(2) When welding is not to be performed, at least ance criteria.
1⁄
16 in. of material shall be removed and the area shall
be faired into the surrounding area.
(3) Resulting irregularities shall be removed to a
smooth surface by a mechanical method. This surface IWA-4462 Mechanical Removal Processes
shall show no visual evidence of irregularities. The (a) If a mechanical removal process is used in an
depth of material to be removed as required by IWA- area where welding is not to be performed, the area
4461.2(a)(1) or (2) shall be measured from the smooth shall be faired into surrounding area.
surface. (b) Where welding is to be performed, the cavity
(b) When preheat is applied in accordance with Table shall be ground smooth and clean with beveled sides
IWA-4461.1-1, material shall be removed to bright and edges rounded to provide suitable accessibility for
metal by a mechanical method. welding.
IWA-4461.3 P-Nos. 8 and 43 Materials. If thermal
removal processes are used on P-No. 8 and P-No. 43
materials, at least 1⁄16 in. (1.6 mm) of material shall
be mechanically removed from the thermally pro- IWA-4500 EXAMINATION AND TEST
cessed area.
IWA-4510 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
IWA-4461.4 Alternative to Mechanical Processing.
Mechanical processing of thermally cut surfaces for (In course of preparation.)
materials identified in IWA-4461.2 and IWA-4461.3 is
not required when using a thermal metal removal
process qualified as follows:
(a) The qualification test shall consist of two coupons
IWA-4520 EXAMINATION
of the same P-No. material to be cut in production.
(b) The qualification coupons shall be cut using the (a) Welding or brazing areas and welded joints made
maximum heat input to be used in production. for installation of items shall be examined in accordance
(c) The thermally cut surface of each coupon shall with the Construction Code identified in the Repair /
be visually examined at 10X and shall be free of Replacement Plan.
cracks. The Owner shall specify surface roughness (b) These examinations may be performed concur-
acceptable for the application and shall verify that the rently with the preservice inspections required by
qualification coupon meets that criterion. IWA-4530.
(d) Each qualification coupon shall be cross sec- (c) Alternative examination methods, a combination
tioned, and the exposed surfaces shall be polished, of methods, or newly developed techniques may be
etched with a suitable etchant, and visually examined substituted for the methods specified in the Construction
at 10X. All sectioned surfaces shall be free of cracks. Code or in this Division, provided the Inspector is
44

[This is electronic SEC11$$$25 page #46 xcep pg #9992 — lhp prints as rhp
satisfied that the results are demonstrated to be equiva- (6) components or connections NPS3 1 and smaller
lent or superior to those of the specified method. (7) tube-to-tubesheet welds when such welds are
made on the cladding
(8) seal welds
(9) welded joints between non-pressure-retaining
A00 IWA-4530 PRESERVICE INSPECTION AND items and the pressure-retaining portion of the compo-
TESTING8 nents
(a) When portions of items requiring preservice or (10) valve discs or seats
inservice inspection are affected by repair /replacement
activities, or for items being installed, including welded
joints made for installation of items, preservice inspec- IWA-4550 CLASS MC AND METALLIC
tions shall be performed in accordance with IWB-2200, PORTIONS OF CLASS CC
IWC-2200, IWD-2200, IWE-2200, IWF-2200, or IWL- CONTAINMENTS
2200 prior to return of the system to service. The
Items subjected to repair /replacement activities shall
preservice inspection may be performed either prior to
be tested in accordance with IWE-5000.
or following the pressure test required by IWA-4540.
(b) For repair /replacement activities on a snubber,
preservice examinations and tests shall be performed
in accordance with IWF-5200, prior to returning the IWA-4600 ALTERNATIVE WELDING
snubber to service. METHODS
(a) When welding under water, the alternative re-
quirements of IWA-4660 may be used in lieu of the
A99 IWA-4540 PRESSURE TESTING OF CLASS 1, welding and nondestructive examination requirements
A00 2, AND 3 ITEMS of the Construction Code or Section III.
(b) When postweld heat treatment is not to be per-
(a) Unless exempted by (b) below, repair/replacement formed, the following provisions may be used.
activities performed by welding or brazing on a pressure- (1) The welding methods of IWA-4620, IWA-
retaining boundary shall include (a)(1) or (a)(2) below. 4630, or IWA-4640 may be used in lieu of the welding
(1) A system hydrostatic test shall be performed and nondestructive examination requirements of the
in accordance with IWA-5000 prior to, or as part of, Construction Code or Section III, provided the require-
returning to service. ments of IWA-4610 are met.
(2) The following requirements shall be met. (2) For welding of Class MC metal containments
(a) The nondestructive examination methodol- and their integral attachments and metallic liners of
ogy and acceptance criteria of the 1992 Edition or later Class CC containments and their integral attachments,
of Section III shall be met prior to return to service. the welding methods of IWA-4620 or IWA-4650 may be
(b) The Owner’s Requirements shall be met used, provided the requirements of IWA-4610 are met.
prior to return to service.
(c) A system leakage test shall be performed
in accordance with IWA-5000.
(b) The following are exempt from any pressure test: IWA-4610 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR A00
(1) cladding ALL MATERIALS
(2) heat exchanger tube plugging and sleeving (a) The area to be welded plus a band around the
(3) piping, pump, and valve welding or brazing area of at least 1-1⁄2 times the component thickness or
that does not penetrate through the pressure boundary 5 in. (127 mm), whichever is less, shall be preheated
(4) flange seating surface when less than half the and maintained at a minimum temperature of 350°F
flange axial thickness is removed and replaced (177°C) for the SMAW process and 300°F (149°F) for
(5) pressure vessel welding when the remaining the GTAW process during welding. The maximum
wall thickness, after metal removal, is at least 90% of interpass temperature shall be 450°F (232°C). Thermo-
the minimum design wall thickness
3 NPS (Nominal Pipe Size) — a designation assigned for the purpose
8 Repair/replacementactivities could affect OM-Code-required pump of convenient specification of pipe size. The actual inside and outside
or valve performance parameters. dimensions are listed in applicable ANSI Standards.
45

couples and recording instruments shall be used to (b) The original defect shall be removed:
monitor the process temperatures. Their attachment and (1) when welding is to be performed in accordance
removal shall be in accordance with Section III. with IWA-4620; or
(b) The welding procedure and the welders or weld- (2) when welding is required in accordance with
ing operators shall be qualified in accordance with IWA-4630 or IWA-4640, and the defect penetrates the
Section IX and the additional requirements of this base material.
Subarticle. (c) The Repair /Replacement Program and Plans, and
(1) Procedure Qualification associated evaluation, shall be subject to review in
(a) The test assembly material for the welding accordance with IWA-4150(d).
procedure qualification test shall be of the same P-
IWA-4611.2 Examination Following Defect Re- A99
Number and Group Number, including a postweld heat
moval
treatment that is at least equivalent to the time and
(a) After final grinding, the affected surfaces, includ-
temperature already applied to the material being
ing surfaces of cavities prepared for welding, shall be
welded.
examined by the magnetic particle or liquid penetrant
(b) If the qualification test assembly material is
method to ensure that the indication has been reduced
a plate or a forging, the axis of the weld shall be
to an acceptable limit in accordance with IWA-3000.
parallel to the principal direction of rolling or forging.
This examination is not required when defect elimination
(c) The included angle of the cavity in the test
removes the full thickness of the weld and back side
assembly shall be no greater than the minimum specified
of the weld joint is not accessible for removal of
to be used in the repair.
examination materials.
(d) The techniques described for the following
(b) Indications detected as a result of the excavation
welding procedures shall be used in the preparation of
that are not associated with the defect being removed
the procedure qualification coupons.
shall be evaluated for acceptability in accordance with
(2) Performance Qualification. If the weld is to
IWA-3000.
be performed where physical obstructions impair the
welder’s ability to perform, the welder shall also demon-
strate the ability to deposit sound weld metal in the
positions required, using the same parameters and simu- IWA-4620 SIMILAR MATERIALS
lated physical obstructions as are involved in the repair / IWA-4621 General Requirements
replacement activity.
(c) The neutron fluence in the weld area shall be (a) Repair /replacement activities on P-Nos. 1, 3,
taken into account when establishing the weld metal 12A, 12B, and 12C2 base materials and associated
composition limits. welds may be performed without the specified postweld
heat treatments, provided the requirements of IWA-
4621(b) and (c) and IWA-4622 through IWA-4624
are met.
(b) The maximum area of an individual weld based
A99 IWA-4611 DEFECT REMOVAL on the finished surface shall be 100 sq in. (64,500 mm2),
IWA-4611.1 General Requirements and the depth of the weld shall not be greater than
(a) Defects shall be removed or reduced in size in one-half of the base metal thickness.
accordance with this Paragraph. The component shall (c) Peening may be used except on the initial and
be acceptable for continued service if the resultant final weld layers.
section thickness created by the cavity is at least the
minimum design thickness. If the resulting section
IWA-4622 Welding Qualifications A00
thickness is less than the minimum design thickness,
the component shall be corrected by repair /replacement (a) The test assembly cavity depth shall be at least
activities in accordance with this Article. Alternatively, one-half the depth of the weld installed during the
the defect removal area and any remaining portion of repair/replacement activity but not less than 1 in.
the flaw may be evaluated and the component accepted (25 mm). The test assembly thickness shall be at least
in accordance with the appropriate flaw evaluation
provisions of Section XI or the design provisions of 2 P-Nos. 12A, 12B, and 12C designations refer to specific material
the Owner’s Requirements and either the Construction classifications originally identified in Section III and subsequently
Code or Section III. reclassified in a later Edition of Section IX.
46

twice the test assembly cavity depth. The test assembly all qualification tests, the base metal Charpy V-notch
shall be large enough to permit removal of the required specimens shall be taken from approximately the same
test specimens. The test assembly dimensions sur- depth as the HAZ specimens and shall be aligned in
rounding the cavity shall be at least the test assembly the same manner as the HAZ specimens in IWA-
thickness, but not less than 6 in. (152 mm). The 4622(d)(1).
qualification test plate shall be prepared in accordance (c) Charpy V-notch tests of the weld metal of the
with Fig. IWA-4622-1. procedure qualification shall meet the requirements as
(b) The test assembly base material for the welding determined in IWA-4622(b).
procedure qualification test shall meet the impact test (d) Charpy V-notch tests of the HAZ of the procedure
requirements of the Construction Code and Owner’s qualification shall be made at the same temperature as
Requirements. If such requirements are not in the the base metal test in IWA-4622(b). Number, location,
Construction Code and Owner’s Requirements, they and orientation of the test specimens shall be as follows:
shall be determined by impact tests of the procedure (1) The specimens shall be removed from a loca-
qualification base material at or below the lowest service tion as near as practical to a depth of one-half the
metal temperature of the item to be repaired. For
46.1

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Fig. IWA-4622-1
FIG. IWA-4622-1 QUALIFICATION TEST PLATE
47

thickness of the deposited weld metal. The coupons second layer shall be deposited with a 1⁄8 in. (3.2 mm)
for HAZ impact specimens shall be taken transverse diameter electrode. Subsequent layers shall be deposited
to the axis of the weld and etched to define the HAZ. with a welding electrode no larger than 5⁄32 in. (4 mm)
See Fig. IWA-4622-1. The notch of the Charpy V- diameter. Bead deposition shall be performed in a
notch specimen may be cut approximately normal to manner shown in Fig. IWA-4623.1-1, Step 3. The
the material surface in such a manner as to include completed weld shall have at least one layer of weld
as much HAZ as possible in the resulting fracture. reinforcement deposited and then this reinforcement
When the material thickness permits, the axis of a shall be removed by mechanical means, making the
specimen shall be inclined to allow the root of the finished surface of the weld substantially flush with
notch to align parallel to the fusion line. the surface surrounding the weld.
(2) The Charpy V-notch test shall be performed (e) The weld area shall be maintained at a tempera-
in accordance with SA-370. Specimens shall be in ture of 450°F–550°F (232°C–288°C) for a minimum
accordance with SA-370, Fig. 11, Type A. A test shall of 2 hr after completion of the weld in P-No. 1
consist of a set of three full-size 10 mm × 10 mm materials. For P-No. 3 materials, the holding time shall
specimens. The lateral expansion, percent shear, ab- be a minimum of 4 hr.
sorbed energy, and the test temperature, as well as the
orientation and location of all tests performed shall be IWA-4623.2 Gas Tungsten-Arc Welding. The pro-
reported in the Procedure Qualification Record. cedure shall include the requirements of IWA-4623.2(a)
(e) The average of the three HAZ Charpy V-notch through (c):
lateral expansion valves shall be equal to or greater (a) The weld metal shall be deposited by the auto-
than the average of the three base metal lateral expansion matic or machine gas tungsten-arc weld process using
valves obtained at the same depth. cold wire feed.
(b) The cavity shall be buttered with the first six
layers of weld metal as shown in Fig. IWA-4623.2-1,
IWA-4623 Welding Procedure Steps 1 through 3, with the weld heat input for each
IWA-4623.1 Shielded Metal-Arc Welding. The pro- layer controlled to within ⫾10% of that used in the
cedure shall include the requirements of IWA-4623.1(a) procedure qualification test. Subsequent layers shall be
through (e): deposited with a heat input equal to or less than that
(a) The weld metal shall be deposited using low used for layers beyond the sixth in the procedure
hydrogen electrode meeting the coating moisture content qualification (see Fig. IWA-4623.2-1, Step 4). The
requirements of SFA-5-5. The maximum bead width completed weld shall have at least one layer of weld
shall be four times the electrode core diameter. reinforcement deposited and then this reinforcement
(b) All covered electrodes from hermetically sealed shall be removed by mechanical means, making the
containers shall immediately be used or placed into finished surface of the weld substantially flush with
holding or drying ovens operating between 225°F the surface surrounding the weld.
(107°C) and 300°F (149°C). Covered electrodes from (c) The weld area shall be maintained at a minimum
other than hermetically sealed containersshall be baked temperature of 300°F (149°C) for a minimum of 2 hr
and maintained in accordance with the manufacturer’s after completion of the weld repair in P-No. 1 materials.
recommendations. After baking and before the elec- For P-No. 3 materials, the holding time shall be a
trodes are allowed to cool below 225°F (107°C), they minimum of 4 hr.
shall be transferred to holding or drying ovens operating
between 225°F (107°C) and 350°F (117°C).
IWA-4624 Examination
(c) Electrodes removed from the holding ovens in
IWA-4623.1(b) for a period in excess of 8 hr for (a) The initial layer shall be examined by the mag-
E70XX electrodes or 4 hr for E80XX and E90XX netic particle method after grinding or machining. Each
electrodes shall be reprocessed in accordance with subsequent layer shall be examined by the magnetic
IWA-4623.1(b). Electrodes shall not be rebaked more particle method if a final volumetric examination will
than once. not be performed.
(d) The cavity shall be buttered using a 3⁄32 in. (b) The weld shall be nondestructively examined after
(2.4 mm) diameter electrode as shown in Fig. IWA- the completed weld has been at ambient temperature for
4623.1-1, Step 1. The weld bead crown surface shall at least 48 hr. The nondestructive examination of the
be removed by grinding or machining before depositing welded region shall include both volumetric [except as
the second layer (see Fig. IWA-4623.1-1, Step 2). The permitted in IWA-4624(a)] and surface examination.
48

IWA-4663.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS IWA-4663.2
TABLE IWA-4662.1-11
DEPTH LIMITATIONS FOR UNDERWATER WELDING Mn + Si Cr + Mo + V Ni + Cu
CE p C − + +
QUALIFICATION 6 5 15
Max. Depth Min. Depth NOTE: The chemical analysis for carbon equivalent calcula-
Type of Welding Qualified2 Qualified3 tions for the production base material may be obtained from
the mill test certificate or chemical analysis. If it is not practi-
Dry Welding D plus 33 ft D minus 33 ft
cal to obtain chemical analysis for Cr, Mo, V, Ni, and Cu, the
Wet Welding with A-No. 8 Fil- D plus 10 ft D minus 33 ft carbon equivalent may be determined by using 0.1 for the term
ler Metals
冤冥
Cr + Mo + V Ni + Cu
Wet Welding with F-No. 4X Fil- D D minus 33 ft + .
5 15
ler Metals
Wet Welding with Other A-No. D plus 33 ft D minus 33 ft4 FIG. IWA-4663.1-1 CARBON EQUIVALENCY
8 and F-No. 4X Filler Metals CALCULATION
GENERAL NOTES:
(1) D is qualification test depth.
(2) For the maximum depth qualified, depth shall be measured from
the lower extremity of the test weldment with a tolerance of plus
or minus 9 in.
(3) For the minimum depth qualified, depth shall be measured from polarity) to electrode positive (reverse polarity), or
the upper extremity of the test weldment with a tolerance of plus
or minus 9 in. vice versa.
(4) Welds at depths less than 10 ft require qualification at the produc- (10) A change from wet backside to dry backside
tion weld minimum depth. for backing thickness less than 1⁄4 in. (6 mm).
(11) For P-No. 1 base metal carbon equivalents as
calculated in accordance with Fig. IWA-4663.1-1, an
increase in the carbon equivalent beyond that of the
supplementary essential variables of Section IX apply procedure qualification test coupon.
to nonimpact-tested base metal. The following variables (12) An increase in the time of electrode exposure
also apply. to water at qualification depth.
(a) Additional essential variables: (13) For P-No. 1 base materials, a change from
(1) A change in the method for underwater trans- multipass per side to single pass per side.
port and storage of filler material (e.g., from sealed (b) Additional nonessential variable: a decrease in
packages to exposed). included angle, a decrease in root opening, or an
(2) Addition or deletion of waterproof or supple- increase in root face.
mentary coatings for the filler metal or a change in
the type of any waterproof or supplementary coatings.
(3) A change in electrode diameter beyond the IWA-4663.2 Performance Qualification. Welders
range used in qualification. and welding operators for wet underwater welding shall
(4) A change in depth beyond that qualified in be qualified in accordance with Section IX and the
accordance with Table IWA-4662.1-1. variables listed below. For P-No. 1 base metals, if
(5) A change in the SFA specification AWS filler mechanical bend testing is attempted in lieu of radio-
metal classification, or, if not conforming to an AWS graphic examination and the coupons fail the require-
filler metal classification, a change in the manufacturer’s ments of QW-302.1, immediate retesting may be by
trade name for the electrode or filler metal. radiographic examination in accordance with QW-302.2.
(6) Addition of welding positions other than those When a welder or welding operator has not welded
qualified in accordance with Table IWA-4662.1-2. with a process in a wet underwater environment for
(7) A change from upward to downward, or vice at least six months, the qualifications for welding with
versa, in the progression specified for any pass of a that process underwater shall expire.
vertical weld. (a) A change in the SFA specification AWS filler
(8) A change from the stringer bead technique to metal classification, or, if not conforming to an AWS
the weave bead technique, or vice versa. For P-No. 8 filler metal classification, a change in the manufacturer’s
and P-No. 4X base metals, this variable applies only trade name for the electrode or filler metal.
to the vertical position. (b) Addition or deletion of waterproof or supplemen-
(9) A change from ac to dc, or vice versa, and, tary coating for the filler metal or a change in the
in dc welding, a change from electrode negative (straight type of any waterproof or supplementary coatings.
63

TABLE IWA-4662.1-2
PROCEDURE AND PERFORMANCE QUALIFICATION — TYPE POSITION LIMITATIONS
Position and Type of Weld Qualified [Note (1)]

Qualification Test Plate Pipe
Plate or Pipe
Weld Positions Groove Fillet Groove Fillet
Plate-groove 1G F F F F
2G H H H H
3G V V
4G O O
Pipe-groove 1G F F F F
2G H H H H
5G F,V,O F,V,O F,V,O F,V,O
6G All All All All
NOTE (1): Positions of welding:
F p Flat
H p Horizontal
V p Vertical
O p Overhead
(c) A change from salt or borated water to fresh accordance with the SFA specification most nearly
water. matching that material (e.g., for ferritic covered elec-
(d) Use of a larger diameter electrode than that used trodes, SFA-5.1).
during performance qualification. (b) The coupons shall be tested as follows:
(e) A change in depth beyond that qualified in accord- (1) The ferrite number shall be directly measured
ance with Table IWA-4662.1-1. from the weld pad for austenitic stainless steel, QW-
(f) Addition of welding positions other than those 442, A-No. 8 filler metal.
qualified in accordance with Table IWA-4662.1-2. (2) One all-weld-metal specimen shall be tension
(g) A change in polarity or type of power source tested.
(e.g., rectifier, motor-generator, inverter). (3) As-deposited chemical composition shall be
(h) A change from stringer bead to weave technique. determined from the weld pad in accordance with the
(i) A change in the welder’s view from beneath to applicable SFA specification or the SFA specification
above the water surface. most nearly matching the material.
(j) A decrease in the included angle, a decrease in
(4) For ferritic weld metal, Charpy V-notch ab-
root opening, or an increase in the root face.
sorbed energy shall be determined in accordance with
IWA-4665(b), and, when applicable, the Construction
A00 IWA-4664 Filler Metal Qualification Code.
(c) Acceptance criteria:
Each filler metal heat, lot, waterproof coating type,
and supplementary coating type to be used in production (1) The ferrite number shall meet the requirements
shall be tested in accordance with the following require- of the Construction Code.
ments. (2) The ultimate tensile strength shall meet the
(a) An all-weld-metal coupon and a weld pad shall minimum tensile strength specified for either of the
be prepared using the production welding procedure at base metals to be joined.
a depth such that the depth of the production weld (3) The chemical composition shall meet the appli-
will be within the depth limitations of Table IWA- cable SFA specification requirements for the as-depos-
4662.1-1. ited chemical composition. For material that does not
(1) For material that conforms to an SFA specifi- conform to an SFA specification, the chemical composi-
cation, the coupons shall be prepared in accordance tion shall meet the requirements specified in the WPS.
with the applicable SFA specification. (4) Charpy V-notch absorbed energy shall meet
(2) For material that does not conform to an the requirements of IWA-4665(c) and, when applicable,
SFA specification, the coupons shall be prepared in the Construction Code.
64

IWA-4665 Alternative Procedure Qualification (c) Ultrasonic, eddy current and visual surface indica-
Requirements tions shall be evaluated using the surface examination
acceptance criteria of the Construction Code, Section
(a) As an alternative to the bend test requirement
III, or this Division.
of Section IX, Charpy V-notch tests may be used when
(d) Personnel performing visual examinations shall
qualifying procedures for wet underwater welding of
be qualified in accordance with IWA-2300 for perform-
P-No. 1 base material.
ance of VT-1 visual examinations and shall have re-
(b) Charpy V-notch tests of the weld metal and heat
ceived additional training in examination of weldments
affected zone (HAZ) of the procedure qualification shall
for fabrication conditions, including dimensional re-
be performed at 32°F. Number, location, and orientation
quirements and fabrication flaws.
of the test specimens shall be as follows.
(1) The specimens shall be removed from a loca- IWA-4666.2 Volumetric Examination. In lieu of
tion as near as practical to a depth of one-half the any required volumetric examination, the following
thickness of the deposited weld metal. The coupons apply:
for HAZ impact specimens shall be taken transverse (a) When practical, a volumetric examination shall
to the axis of the weld and etched to define the HAZ. be conducted with an ultrasonic examination procedure.
The notch of the Charpy V-notch specimen shall be The ultrasonic examination shall be conducted in accord-
cut approximately normal to the material surface in ance with Section V, Article 5. Indications shall be
such a manner as to include as much HAZ as possible evaluated using the volumetric acceptance criteria of
in the resulting fracture. When the material thickness the Construction Code, Section III, or this Division.
permits, the longitudinal specimen axis shall be perpen- (b) When ultrasonic volumetric examination is not
dicular to the fusion line. practical, a nondestructive surface examination shall be
(2) The Charpy V-notch test shall be performed performed on the root pass and on the finished weld.
in accordance with SA-370. Specimens shall be in When it is impractical to perform a surface examination
accordance with SA-370, Fig. 11, type A. A test shall on either the root or the finished weld, the provisions
consist of a set of three full-size 10 mm x 10 mm of IWA-4666.1 apply.
specimens. The absorbed energy and the test tempera-
ture, as well as the orientation and location of the
tests performed, shall be reported in the Procedure
IWA-4700 HEAT EXCHANGER TUBING
Qualification Record.
(c) The averages of the three weld metal impact IWA-4710 PLUGGING
tests and the three HAZ impact tests shall each be at
IWA-4711 Explosive Welding
least 25 ft. lbs.
(d) Charpy V-notch tests of the weld metal are not If explosive welding is used to weld plugs to Class
required for austenitic (A-No. 8) or nickel-base (F-No. 1 heat exchanger tubes or heat exchanger tubesheet
4X) filler material. bore holes, the requirements of IWA-4711.1 through
IWA-4711.4 shall be met. These requirements may be
used for Class 2 and Class 3 heat exchangers.
IWA-4666 Examination
IWA-4711.1 General Requirements
When it is impractical to perform the nondestructive
(a) Material used in manufacturing plugs shall be
examinations required by this Division or the Construc-
produced in compliance with requirements of a SA
tion Code because of the underwater environment, the
or SB material specification or any other material
following alternative requirements apply.
specification that has been approved for Section III.
A00 IWA-4666.1 Surface Examination. In lieu of any (b) Each plug shall be traceable to a Certified Material
required surface examination, the following apply: Test Report that indicates the mechanical properties
(a) When practical, a surface examination shall be and chemistry.
conducted with an ultrasonic or eddy current surface (c) Records shall be maintained by the Owner, and
examination procedure qualified for the underwater shall include the following:
environment. (1) plugging procedure
(b) When ultrasonic and eddy current surface exami- (2) welding procedure qualifications
nation is not practical, the surface shall be visually (3) welding operator performance qualifications
examined with a procedure meeting the requirements (4) material certifications
of IWA-2200. (5) location of all plugged tubes or holes
65

IWA-4711.1 1998 SECTION XI, DIVISION 1 IWA-4711.2.1
(6) results of heat exchanger examinations required (12) any change in the nominal plug configuration;
by this Subparagraph (13) a change of 10% or more in the nominal or
(7) specific tubes or holes plugged by each welding average clearance (stand-off) between the tube or hole
operator and the plug. Stand-off shall be determined by consider-
(d) Records of the procedure and welder qualification ing the nominal plug diameter in the bonding area and
shall include the results of all tests required by IWA- the nominal, or, if the tubes of the heat exchanger had
4711.2, and shall be certified by the Repair /Replacement been expanded, the average value of tube inside diame-
Organization. The Procedure Qualification Records shall ters in the bonding area. Such average values should
include a description of all essential and nonessential be determined by measuring a sufficient number of
variables [IWA-4711.2.1(a) and (b)]. The operator per- production tubes of equal size, which have been simi-
formance qualification record shall also list the proce- larly expanded.
dure number and revision that was used for testing; (b) Nonessential Variables
the record of operator experience shall be kept current. (1) a change in the P-Number of tubesheet material
for tube plugging (when plug is not joined to tubesheet);
IWA-4711.2 Welding Qualification (2) a change in the tubesheet cladding (when the
IWA-4711.2.1 Procedure Qualifications. The plug is not joined to the cladding) when the explosive
Welding Procedure Specification for plugging shall be charge is installed within one tube diameter of the
qualified as a new procedure specification and shall be cladding metal;
completely requalified if any of the essential variables (3) for tube plugging, a change in the tube-to-
listed below are changed. Nonessential variables may be tubesheet seal welding procedure when the explosive
changed without requalification, provided the Welding charge is installed within one tube diameter of the
Procedure Specification is amended to show these tube-to-tubesheet seal weld [see IWA-4711.2.1(c)(3)].
changes. (c) Test Assembly
(a) Essential Variables (1) The procedure qualification shall be made on
(1) a change in the P-Number classification (Sec- a test assembly that simulates the conditions to be used
tion IX, QW-422) of any of the materials being joined. in production with respect to position, tube hole pattern,
This includes the tube, plug, tubesheet, or tubesheet and the essential variables listed in this Subparagraph.
cladding. If the plug is to be joined to any part of (2) The test assembly tubesheet thickness shall be
the tubesheet cladding, this cladding must be duplicated as thick as the production tubesheet, except that it need
in the procedure qualification. Materials not listed under not be l in. greater than the length of the explosive plug.
a P-Number require separate qualification. (3) When the explosive charge in the heat ex-
(2) a decrease in the nominal design tube wall changer is to be placed less than one tube diameter
thickness of 10% or more (if the plug is welded to from cladding or a tube-to-tubesheet weld, the qualifica-
the tube); tion test assembly shall also contain cladding or tube-
(3) a change in the tubesheet hole pattern; to-tubesheet welds, as applicable.
(4) a decrease in the proximity of two simultane- (4) The minimum number of explosive welds re-
ously detonated parts; quired for procedure qualification shall be 10 welds
(5) any increase in the number of plugs to be made consecutively.
simultaneously detonated; (d) Examination of Test Assembly
(6) a change in detail controlling explosive densi- (1) When cladding or welds are required per IWA-
ties and charge-to-mass ratios; 4711.2.1(c)(3), such cladding and tube-to-tubesheet
(7) a change in the type of explosive; welds shall be examined by the liquid penetrant method
(8) a change of 10% or more in the explosive and shall comply with the acceptance standards of
charge mass; NB-5000.
(9) a decrease of 15% or more in the tubesheet (2) Each plug weld and tube-to-tubesheet weld
ligament; (when applicable) shall be sectioned longitudinally to
(10) the deletion of cleaning of the tube, plug, or reveal four cross-sectional faces, 180 deg. apart. After
hole contact surfaces, or a change in the cleanliness polishing and etching the four faces, each explosive
requirements (including surface oxide removal) for such weld joint area shall be metallographically examined
surfaces prior to explosive welding; at 50X or greater magnification for the length of
(11) a change of whether or not the tubes had been the explosive bond. The bonding shall be considered
expanded into contact with the tubesheets in the areas acceptable if there is a minimum of five times the
where bonding occurs; nominal tube wall thickness of continuous bond between
66

IWA-4725 Expansion (c) a change of 10% or more in the explosive

density or charge-to-mass ratio.
IWA-4725.1 General Requirements. When a sleeve
(7) for expansion procedures using a combination
is expanded against a tube by a mechanical, hydraulic,
of processes, a change in any of the essential variables
or explosive process so that the sleeve is permanently in IWA-4725.2.1(a)(5) and (6), as applicable.
deformed and the attachment depends upon friction or (b) Test Assembly. The procedure shall be qualified
interference at the interface, IWA-4725.2 through IWA- using a test assembly that simulates the conditions that
4725.4 shall be met. will be encountered in production with respect to the
essential variables.
IWA-4725.2 Expansion Qualification (c) Test Assembly Within Tubesheet. The test assem-
bly tubesheet thickness shall be at least as thick as
the production tubesheet except that it need not be
IWA-4725.2.1 Procedure Qualification more than 1 in. greater than the length of the sleeve
(a) Essential Variables attachment.
(1) a change in the basic expansion process; (d) Qualification of Test Assembly. Specimens repre-
(2) a change of 10% or more in sleeve material senting the expanded sleeve attachment to a tube shall
yield strength; be cyclic tested in accordance with Section III, Appendix
(3) a change in the expansion length; II. This fatigue test shall demonstrate the adequacy of
(4) a change that results in an expansion diameter the sleeve attachment to withstand the specified design
outside the range of sleeve or tube expansion diameters loadings without exceeding the specified design leak-
qualified. The range of sleeve or tube expansion diame- age limit.
ters qualified shall be the expansion diameters between IWA-4725.2.2 Performance Qualification. The
the minimum and maximum expansion diameters ob- expansion operator shall demonstrate the ability to
tained in qualification tests. expand sleeve attachments in accordance with the SPS.
(5) for mechanical expansion:
(a) a reduction in the minimum rolling torque; IWA-4725.3 Sleeving Procedure Specification. The
(b) a change in expansion roller geometry; SPS shall delineate the requirements for mechanical
(c) a reduction in the minimum expansion pres- expansion. These requirements shall conform to the
sure if expansion is controlled by hydraulic pressure Construction Code and Owner’s Requirements.
only. IWA-4725.4 Examination. The expanded sleeve at-
(6) for explosive expansion: tachment shall be examined to confirm that the attach-
(a) a change in the type of explosive; ment is in the correct location and conforms to the
(b) a change of 10% or more in the explosive requirements of the Construction Code and Owner’s
charge mass; Requirements.
73

ARTICLE IWA-5000
SYSTEM PRESSURE TESTS
IWA-5100 GENERAL IWA-5200 SYSTEM TEST REQUIREMENT

IWA-5110 PERIODIC SYSTEM PRESSURE IWA-5210 TEST
TESTS
IWA-5211 Test Description A00
(a) System pressure tests shall be conducted in ac-
Pressure retaining components within each system
cordance with the Examination Categories identified in
boundary shall be subject to the following applicable
Table IWB-2500-1, Category B-P; Table IWC-2500-1,
system pressure tests referenced in Table IWA-5210-
Category C-H; and Table IWD-2500-1, Category D-B.
1 under which conditions a VT-2 visual examination
(b) The pressure testing requirements for Class MC
is performed in accordance with IWA-5240 to detect
and CC components are identified in Articles IWE and
leakage:
IWL, respectively.
(a) a system leakage test conducted while the system
(c) Piping that penetrates a containment vessel is
is in operation, during a system operability test, or
exempt from the periodic system pressure test when
while the system is at rest conditions using an external
the piping and isolation valves perform a containment
pressurization source;
function and the balance of the piping system is outside
(b) a system hydrostatic test conducted during a plant
the scope of this Division.
shutdown at an elevated test pressure as specified in
IWB-5230, IWC-5230, or IWD-5222; and
(c) a system pneumatic test conducted in lieu of
either of the above system pressure tests for Class 2
A00 IWA-5120 SYSTEM PRESSURE TESTS FOR or 3 components as permitted by IWC-5000 or IWD-
REPAIR /REPLACEMENT 5000. The requirements for system leakage and hydro-
ACTIVITIES static tests are applicable to pneumatic tests.
(a) Items subjected to repair /replacement activities
shall be pressure tested when required by IWA-4500.
(b) The test pressure and temperature for a system IWA-5212 Pressure and Temperature A00
hydrostatic test, subsequent to the repair /replacement
(a) System leakage tests and system hydrostatic tests
activity, shall comply with the system test pressure
shall be conducted at the pressure and temperature
and temperature specified in IWA-5212, applicable to
specified in IWB-5000, IWC-5000, and IWD-5000. The
the system containing the item on which the repair /
system hydrostatic test pressure shall not exceed the
replacement activity was performed.
maximum allowable test pressure of any component
(c) When the area of the repair /replacement activity
within the system pressure test boundary.
is isolable within a portion of a system, only that
(b) When conducting a system leakage test described
portion need be pressure tested.
in IWA-5211(a), system pressure shall be verified by
(d) When the system hydrostatic test of IWA-5120(b)
normal system instrumentation, test instrumentation,
imposes test pressure and temperature in conflict with
or through performance of the system operating or
limitations included in the plant Technical Specifica-
surveillance procedure.
tions, a system leakage test, in accordance with IWB-
5220, IWC-5220, or IWD-5221, shall be acceptable in
lieu of the system hydrostatic test. Footnote deleted.
74

TABLE IWA-5210-1
REFERENCE PARAGRAPHS FOR SYSTEM PRESSURE TEST AND VISUAL EXAMINATIONS
(VT-2) REQUIREMENTS
System Test Tests for Visual

Pressure Temperature Repair/Replacement Examinations Inspector Corrective
Tests and Pressure Activities VT-2 Duties Actions
IWA-5211(a) IWA-5212 IWA-4500 IWA-2212 IWA-2120(a) IWA-5250

IWA-5211(b) IWA-5213 IWA-5240
IWB-5210 IWB-5220 IWA-4500 IWA-2212 IWA-2120(a) IWA-5250

IWB-5240 IWA-5240
IWC-5210 IWC-5220 IWA-4500 IWA-2212 IWA-2120(a) IWA-5250

IWC-5240 IWA-5240
IWD-5210 IWD-5220 IWA-4500 IWA-2212 IWA-2120(a) IWA-5250

IWD-5230 IWA-5240
(c) The system test conditions shall be maintained for insulated systems, and 10 min for noninsulated
essentially constant during the course of the visual systems or components.
examination, except as provided in IWA-5245. (c) system pneumatic tests — 10 min holding time
(d) When conducting system pressure tests described required after attaining the test pressure.
in IWA-5211(b) and (c), the requirements of IWA-
5260 shall be met.
(e) When portions of a system are subject to system IWA-5214 Preservice Test
pressure tests associated with two different system
functions, the visual examination need only be per- A preservice system pressure test is not required
formed during the test conducted at the higher of the by this Article, except following repair /replacement
test pressures of the respective system function, except activities as required by IWA-5120.
as permitted in IWA-5222.
(f) A system hydrostatic test [IWA-5211(b)] and
accompanying visual examination are acceptable in lieu
of the system leakage test [IWA-5211(a)] and visual IWA-5220 TEST PRESSURIZATION
examination. BOUNDARIES2
(g) The system test pressure and temperature may IWA-5221 System Leakage Test Boundary 98
be obtained by using any means that comply with the A00
plant Technical Specifications. The boundary subject to test pressurization during a
system leakage test [IWA-5211(a)] includes the pressure
retaining components to be tested in accordance with
IWB-5222, IWC-5222, and IWD-5240.
IWA-5213 Test Condition Holding Time
The holding time after pressurization to test condi-
tions, before the visual examinations commence, shall IWA-5222 System Hydrostatic Test Boundary
be as follows:
(a) system leakage tests — no holding time required (a) The boundary subject to test pressurization during
after attaining test pressure and temperature; except a system hydrostatic test [IWA-5211(b)] shall be defined
that for tests required by IWA-4540, a 10 min holding by the system boundary (or each portion of the bound-
time for noninsulated systems or components, or 4 hr ary) within which the components have the same mini-
for insulated systems or components, is required after mum required classification and are designed to the
attaining test pressure and temperature.
(b) system hydrostatic tests — 4 hr holding time 2 The boundary limits are generally defined by the location of the
required after attaining the test pressure and temperature safety class interface valves within the system.
75

same pressure rating as governed by the system function nents) for evidence of leakage, or other areas to which
and the internal fluid operating conditions, respectively. such leakage may be channeled, shall be required.
(b) Systems which share safety functions for different (c) Discoloration or residue on surfaces examined
modes of plant operation, and within which the compo- shall be given particular attention to detect evidence
nent classifications differ, shall be subject to separate of boric acid accumulations from borated reactor coolant
system hydrostatic tests of each portion of the system leakage.
boundary having the same minimum required design
pressure ratings.
(c) Systems designed to operate at different pressures
under several modes of plant operation or post-accident IWA-5243 Components With Leakage Collection
conditions shall be subject to a system hydrostatic test Systems
within the test boundary defined by the operating mode
with the higher pressure. Where leakages from components are normally ex-
(d) Where the respective system design pressure rat- pected and collected (such as valve stems, pump seals,
ings on the suction and discharge sides of system or vessel flange gaskets) the VT-2 visual examination
pumps differ, the system hydrostatic test boundary shall shall be conducted by verifying that the leakage collec-
be divided into two separate boundaries (such as suction tion system is operative.
side and discharge side test boundaries). In the case
of positive displacement pumps, the boundary interface
shall be considered as the pump. In the case of centrifu-
gal pumps, the boundary interface shall be the first IWA-5244 Buried Components
shutoff valve on the discharge side of the pump. (a) For buried components surrounded by an annulus,
the VT-2 visual examination shall consist of an examina-
tion for evidence of leakage at each end of the annulus
IWA-5240 VISUAL EXAMINATION and at low point drains.
(b) For buried components where a VT-2 visual
IWA-5241 Noninsulated Components examination cannot be performed, the examination re-
(a) The VT-2 visual examination shall be conducted quirement is satisfied by the following:
by examining the accessible external exposed surfaces of (1) The system pressure test for buried components
pressure retaining components for evidence of leakage. that are isolable by means of valves shall consist of
(b) For components whose external surfaces are inac- a test that determines the rate of pressure loss. Alterna-
cessible for direct VT-2 visual examination, only the tively, the test may determine the change in flow
examination of the surrounding area (including floor between the ends of the buried components. The accept-
areas or equipment surfaces located underneath the able rate of pressure loss or flow shall be established
components) for evidence of leakage shall be required. by the Owner.
(2) The system pressure test for nonisolable buried
components shall consist of a test to confirm that flow
IWA-5242 Insulated Components during operation is not impaired.
(3) Test personnel need not be qualified for VT-
(a) For systems borated for the purpose of controlling 2 visual examination.
reactivity, insulation shall be removed from pressure
retaining bolted connections for VT-2 visual examina-
tion. For other components, a VT-2 visual examination
may be conducted without the removal of insulation
IWA-5245 Elevated Temperature Tests
by examining the accessible and exposed surfaces and
joints of the insulation. Essentially vertical surfaces of The visual examination of system components requir-
insulation need only be examined at the lowest elevation ing a test temperature above 200°F (93°C) during the
where leakage may be detectable. Essentially horizontal system pressure test may be conducted after the pressure
surfaces of insulation shall be examined at each insula- holding period of IWA-5213 is satisfied, and the pres-
tion joint. sure is lowered to the level corresponding with a
(b) When examining insulated components, the exam- temperature of 200°F (93°C), in accordance with allow-
ination of the surrounding area (including floor areas able cooldown rates established by fracture prevention
or equipment surfaces located underneath the compo- criteria.
76

A99 IWA-5250 CORRECTIVE ACTION and that are conducted within a period not exceeding
2 weeks.
(a) The sources of leakage detected during the con-
duct of a system pressure test shall be located and
evaluated by the Owner for corrective action as follows. IWA-5264 Ranges
(1) Buried components with leakage losses in ex-
(a) Analog pressure gages used in testing shall have
cess of limits acceptable for continued service shall be
dials graduated over a range of at least 1.5 times, but
corrected by repair /replacement activities.
not more than 4 times, the intended maximum test
(2) If leakage occurs at a bolted connection in a
pressures.
system borated for the purpose of controlling reactivity,
(b) Digital pressure measuring instruments used in
one of the bolts shall be removed, VT-3 examined,
testing shall be selected such that the intended maximum
and evaluated in accordance with IWA-3100. The bolt
test pressure shall not exceed 70% of the calibrated
selected shall be the one closest to the source of leakage.
range of the instrument.
When the removed bolt has evidence of degradation, all
remaining bolting in the connection shall be removed,
VT-3 examined, and evaluated in accordance with IWA-5265 Location
IWA-3100.
(a) When testing an isolated component, the pressure
(3) Components requiring correction shall have
measuring instrument or sensor shall be connected close
repair /replacement activities performed in accordance
to the component.
with IWA-4000.
(b) When testing a group of components or a multi-
(b) If boric acid residues are detected on components,
component system, the pressure measuring instrument
the leakage source and the areas of general corrosion
or sensor shall be connected to any point within the
shall be located. Components with local areas of general
pressure boundary of the components or system such
corrosion that reduce the wall thickness by more than
that the imposed pressure on any component, including
10% shall be evaluated to determine whether the compo-
static head, will not exceed 106% of the specified test
nent may be acceptable for continued service, or whether
pressure for the system; even though the specified test
repair /replacement activities will be performed.
pressure may not be achieved at the highest elevations
in the system.
IWA-5260 INSTRUMENTS FOR SYSTEM

HYDROSTATIC TESTS IWA-5300 TEST RECORDS
IWA-5261 Type The record of the visual examination conducted
Any pressure measuring instrument or sensor, analog during a system pressure test shall include the procedure
or digital, including the pressure measuring instrument documenting the system test condition and system
of the normal operating system instrumentation (such pressure boundary. Any source of leakage or evidence
as control room instruments), may be used, provided of structural distress shall be itemized, and the location
the requirements of IWA-5260 are met. and corrective action documented.
IWA-5262 Accuracy
The pressure measuring instrument or sensor used
in hydrostatic testing shall provide results accurate to
within 0.5% of full scale for analog gages and 0.5%
over the calibrated range for digital instruments. IWA-5400 DELETED A99
A00
IWA-5263 Calibration
All pressure measuring instruments shall be calibrated
against a standard deadweight tester or calibrated master
gage. The test gages shall be calibrated before each
test or series of tests. A series of tests is a group of
tests that use the same pressure measuring instruments
77

(b) The inservice inspection summary report shall identifying film artifacts that might appear as material
be submitted within 90 calendar days of the completion discontinuities in the reproduction.
of each refueling outage.
IWA-6330 CONSTRUCTION RECORDS

Records designated by the Owner in accordance with
NCA-4134.17 shall be retained.
IWA-6300 RETENTION
IWA-6310 MAINTENANCE OF RECORDS
IWA-6340 INSERVICE INSPECTION A99
The Owner shall retain records and reports identified RECORDS
in IWA-6330 and IWA-6340 as a minimum. The records
and reports shall be filed and maintained in a manner The Owner shall designate the records to be main-
which will allow access by the Inspector. The Owner tained. Such records shall include the following, as
shall provide suitable protection from deterioration and applicable:
damage for all records and reports, in accordance with (a) record index
the Owner’s Quality Assurance Program, for the service (b) preservice and inservice inspection plans and
lifetime of the component or system. Storage shall be schedules
either at the plant site or at another location that (c) preservice and inservice inspection reports
will meet the access and Quality Assurance Program (d) records and reports of repair /replacement activ-
requirements. ities
(e) records of flaw acceptance by analytical evalu-
ation
(f) records of regions in ferritic Class 1 standards
with modified acceptance standards
(g) nondestructive examination procedures
IWA-6320 REPRODUCTION AND
(h) nondestructive examination records
MICROFILMING
(i) pressure test procedures
Records and reports shall be either the original (j) pressure test records
or a reproduced, legible copy. Radiographs may be (k) for Class MC, bolt torque or tension test records
microfilmed; however, the Owner’s Quality Assurance (Table IWE-2500-2)
Program shall include a system of monitoring the (l) for Class CC
accuracy of the reproduction process so that when the (1) tendon force and elongation measurement rec-
microfilm is projected to the original size it will provide ords (IWL-2522)
the same information retrieval capability as the original (2) tendon wire and strand sample test results
radiograph. The accuracy of the reproduction process (IWL-2523)
includes the exposure (or multiple exposures for density (3) free water documentation (IWL-2524.2)
coverage), focusing, contrast, and resolution. The Qual- (4) corrosion protection medium analysis results
ity Assurance Program shall also provide a system for (IWL-2525)
79

ARTICLE IWA-9000 A00
GLOSSARY
applied stress (␴) — a stress resolvable into membrane bobbin coil — a circular inside diameter eddy current
and bending components and including pressure, ther- coil wound such that the coil is concentric with the
mal, discontinuity, and residual effects acting at the tube during examination
flaw location buried component or support — a component or support
appurtenance — an item to be attached to a stamped that is buried or concrete encased
component that has work performed on it requiring cold shutdown — see plant technical specifications
verification by an Inspector
commercial service — nuclear power plant operation
assess — to determine by evaluation of data compared
commencing with the date the power unit is determined
with previously obtained data such as operating data
by the Owner to be available for the regular production
or design specifications
of electricity
Authorized Inspection Agency — an organization that
is empowered by an enforcement authority to provide component — an item in a nuclear power plant such
inspection personnel and services as required by this as a vessel, pump, valve, or piping system
Section component standard support — a support consisting
Authorized Nuclear Inservice Inspector — a person who of one or more generally mass-produced units usually
is employed and has been qualified by an Authorized referred to as catalog items
Inspection Agency to verify that examinations, tests, component support — a metal support designed to
and repair /replacement activities (that do not include transmit loads from a component to the load-carrying
welding or brazing) are performed in accordance with building or foundation structure. Component supports
the requirements of this Section include piping supports and encompass those structural
Authorized Nuclear Inservice Inspector Supervisor — elements relied upon to either support the weight or
a person who is employed by an Authorized Inspection provide structural stability to components.
Agency to supervise Authorized Nuclear Inservice In- constant load type support — spring type support
spectors and who is qualified as an Authorized Nuclear that produces a relatively constant supporting force
Inservice Inspector throughout a specified deflection
Authorized Nuclear Inspector — an employee of an
construction — an all-inclusive term comprising materi-
Authorized Inspection Agency who has been qualified
als, design, fabrication, examination, testing, inspection,
in accordance with NCA-5000 of Section III
and certification required in the manufacture and instal-
beltline region — the region of the reactor vessel (shell lation of items
material including welds, heat affected zones, and plates
or forgings) that directly surrounds the effective height Construction Code — nationally recognized Codes,
of the active core and adjacent regions of the reactor Standards, and Specifications (e.g., ASME, ASTM,
vessel that are predicted to experience sufficient neutron USAS, ANSI, API, AWWA, AISC, MSS, AWS) includ-
radiation damage to be considered in the selection of ing designated Cases, providing construction require-
the most limiting material with regard to radiation ments for an item
damage core support structures — those structures or parts of
bending stress (␴b) — component of primary stress structures that are designed to provide direct support
proportional to distance from centroid of solid section. It or restraint of the core (fuel and blanket assemblies)
excludes discontinuity stresses and stress concentrations. within the reactor pressure vessel
80

crack arrest fracture toughness (KIa) — the critical examination category — a grouping of items to be
value of the stress intensity factor (KI) for crack arrest examined or tested
as a function of temperature explosive welding — a solid state welding process
crack tip — the extremity of the flaw. The boundary wherein coalescence is produced by the application of
between the flaw and the adjacent material at the pressure by means of an explosive
intersection of the two flaw faces. fabrication — actions such as forming, machining,
critical flaw size — the flaw size that will cause assembling, welding, brazing, heat treating, examination,
failure under a specified load calculated using fracture testing, inspection, and certification, but excluding de-
mechanics. The minimum critical flaw size for normal sign, required to manufacture components, parts, or
or upset conditions (Service Level A and B) is ac; the appurtenances
minimum critical initiation flaw size for emergency and Faulted Conditions — those operating conditions associ-
faulted conditions is ai. ated with extremely low probability postulated events
defect — a flaw (imperfection or unintentional disconti- (Service Level D)
nuity) of such size, shape, orientation, location, or flaw — an imperfection or unintentional discontinuity
properties as to be rejectable that is detectable by nondestructive examination
design life — the period of time for which a component flaw aspect ratio (a /ᐉ) — the ratio of flaw depth (a)
is designed to meet the criteria set forth in the Design for surface flaws, or one-half of the flaw depth (2a)
Specification for subsurface flaws, to the length of the flaw (ᐉ),
design lifetime — see design life where a, 2a, and ᐉ are the dimensions of the rectangle
Design Report — the design document which shows circumscribing the flaw. (See Figs. IWA-3310-1 through
that the allowable limits stated in the construction code IWA-3390-1.)
are not exceeded for the loadings specified in the design flaw depth — the depth is the maximum through-
specification thickness dimension (a or 2a) of the rectangle circum-
Design Specification — a document prepared by the scribing the flaw when drawn normal to the surface
Owner or Owner’s Designee which provides a complete of the component
basis for construction in accordance with the construc- fracture initiation — level at which the applied stress
tion code intensity (KI) is equal to or exceeds the fracture tough-
ness (KIc)
discontinuity — a lack of continuity or cohesion; an
interruption in the normal physical structure of material general corrosion — an approximately uniform wastage
or a product of a surface of a component, through chemical or
electrochemical action, free of deep pits or cracks
dissimilar metal weld — a weld between (a) carbon
or low alloy steels to high alloy steels, (b) carbon or hanger — an item that carries the weight of components
low alloy steels to high nickel alloys, or (c) high alloy or piping from above with the supporting members
steels to high nickel alloys being mainly in tension
Emergency Conditions — those operating conditions hot functional testing — a series of preoperational tests,
which have a low probability of occurrence (Service prior to reactor criticality, to ensure that the equipment
Level C) meets the design parameters at normal system tempera-
tures and pressures
enforcement authority — a regional or local governing
body, such as a State or Municipality of the United hot standby — see plant technical specifications
States or a Province of Canada, empowered to enact imperfection — a condition of being imperfect; a depar-
and enforce Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code legislation ture of a quality characteristic from its intended con-
engineering evaluation — an evaluation of indications dition
that exceed allowable acceptance standards to determine indication — the response or evidence from the applica-
if the margins required by the Design Specifications tion of a nondestructive examination
and Construction Code are maintained inservice examination — the process of visual, surface,
evaluation — the process of determining the significance or volumetric examination performed in accordance
of examination or test results, including the comparison with the rules and requirements of this Division
of examination or test results with applicable acceptance inservice inspection — methods and actions for assuring
criteria or previous results the structural and pressure-retaining integrity of safety-
81

related nuclear power plant components in accordance nondestructive examination — an examination by the
with the rules of this Section visual, surface, or volumetric method
inservice life — the period of time from the initial nonplanar flaw — a flaw oriented in more than one
use of an item until its retirement from service plane. It may be curvilinear or a combination of two
or more inclined planes. (See Fig. IWA-3340-1.)
inspection — verification of the performance of exami-
normal operating conditions — the operating conditions
nations and tests by an Inspector
during reactor startup, operation at power, hot standby,
Inspection Program — the plan and schedule for per- and reactor cooldown to cold shutdown conditions. Test
forming examinations or tests conditions are excluded.
Inspector — an Authorized Nuclear Inservice Inspector, normal plant operation — the conditions of startup,
except for those instances where so designated as an hot standby, operation within the normal power range,
Authorized Nuclear Inspector and cooldown and shutdown of the plant
installation — those actions required to place and attach open ended — a condition of piping or lines that
components to their supports and join items of a nuclear permits free discharge to atmospheric or containment
power system by welding or mechanical means atmosphere
item — a material, part, appurtenance, piping subassem-
bly, component, or component support overpressure protection — the means by which compo-
KI — see stress intensity factor nents, or groups of components, are protected from
overpressure, as required by the applicable Construction
KIa — see crack arrest fracture toughness
Code, by the use of pressure relieving devices or other
KIc — see plane strain fracture toughness design provisions
KId — dynamic initiation fracture toughness obtained Owner — the organization legally responsible for the
under fast or rapidly applied loading conditions construction and /or operation of a nuclear facility in-
KIR — the crack growth resistance (fracture toughness) cluding but not limited to one who has applied for,
expressed in units corresponding to KI. The value of or who has been granted, a construction permit or
KIR defined in Appendix G is the lesser of KIc and operating license by the regulatory authority having
KIa for the material and temperature involved. lawful jurisdiction
laminar flaw — planar flaws that are oriented within Owner’s Requirements — those technical requirements
10 deg. of a plane parallel to the surface of the prepared by or for the Owner that define the material,
component. (See Fig. IWA-3360-1.) design, fabrication, and examination requirements for
linear flaw — a flaw having finite length and narrow an item in excess of Construction Code requirements
uniform width and depth. (See Fig. IWA-3400-1.) when a Construction Code is specified, or in place of
lowest service temperature — the minimum temperature a Construction Code when one is not specified
of the fluid retained by a component or, alternatively, planar flaw — a flat two-dimensional flaw oriented in
the calculated volumetric average metal temperature a plane other than parallel to the surface of the compo-
expected during normal operation, whenever the pres- nent. (See Fig. IWA-3310-1.)
sure within the component exceeds 20% of the preopera- plane strain fracture toughness (KIc) — the material
tional system hydrostatic test pressure toughness property measured in terms of the stress
material — metallic materials manufactured to an SA, intensity factor, KI, which will lead to nonductile crack
SB, or SFA specification or any other material specifica- propagation
tion permitted by this Section or Section III post-tensioning — a method of prestressing concrete
membrane stress (␴m) — the component of normal in which the tendons are tensioned after the concrete
stress which is uniformly distributed and equal to the has cured
average value of stress across the thickness of the prestressed concrete — reinforced concrete in which
section under consideration there have been introduced internal stresses of such
multiple flaws — two or more proximate discontinuous magnitude and distribution that the stresses resulting
flaws. They may be planar, coplanar, or separate. from loads are counteracted to a desired degree
neutron fluence — the number of fast neutrons per RTNDT — the reference nil-ductility transition tempera-
unit area received by a cross-sectional component. This ture established in NB-2330 from drop weight and
is a time integral of neutron flux at a given location Charpy V-notch tests to account for the effect of
in a component. irradiation
82

reconciliation — the process of evaluating and justifying weight of a component or piping from below with the
use of alternative Construction Code requirements or supporting members being mainly in compression
revised Owner’s Requirements
support part — a part or subassembly of a component
regulatory authority — a federal government agency, support or piping support
such as the United States Nuclear Regulatory Commis-
sion, that is empowered to issue and enforce regulations surface flaw — a flaw that either penetrates the surface
affecting the design, construction, and operation of or is less than a given distance from the surface. (See
nuclear power plants Fig. IWA-3310-1.)
reinforced concrete — concrete containing reinforce- tendon — an assembly of prestressing steel, anchorages,
ment and designed so that the two materials act together and couplings, which imparts prestressing forces to
in resisting force concrete
relevant condition — a condition observed during a
visual examination that requires supplemental examina- terminal ends — the extremities of piping runs that
tion, corrective measure, correction by repair /replace- connect to structures, components, or pipe anchors,
ment activities, or analytical evaluation each of which acts as a rigid restraint or provides at
least 2 degrees of restraint to piping thermal expansion
Repair /Replacement Organization — the organization
that performs repair /replacement activities under the test — a procedure to obtain information through
provisions of the Owner’s Quality Assurance Program. measurement or observation
The Owner may be the Repair /Replacement Organi-
zation. text information — information stored on the recording
media to support recorded eddy current data. Examples
rerating — a nonphysical change to an item or piping include tube and steam generator identifications, opera-
system done by changing its design ratings (e.g., internal tor name, date of examination, and examination results.
or external pressure or temperature). Rerating covers
pressure boundary items, core supports, and component unbonded tendons — tendons in which the prestressing
supports steel is permanently free to move relative to the concrete
safety function — a function that is necessary to ensure to which they are applying prestressing forces
(1) the integrity of the reactor coolant pressure boundary, unit of data storage — each discrete physical recording
(2) the capability to shut down the reactor and maintain medium on which eddy current data and text information
it in a safe shutdown condition, or (3) the capability are stored. Examples include tape cartridge and
to prevent or mitigate the consequences of accidents that floppy disk.
could result in potential offsite exposures comparable to
the guideline exposures of 10CFR100 variable spring type support — a spring type support
seal weld — a nonstructural weld intended to prevent providing a variable supporting force throughout a
leakage, where the strength is provided by a separate specified deflection
means verify — to determine that a particular action has been
stress — the intensity of the internal forces or compo- performed in accordance with the rules and requirements
nents of forces that act on a plane through a given of this Section either by witnessing the action or by
point. Stress is expressed in force per unit area. reviewing records
stress intensity factor (KI) — a measure of the stress- vibration control and sway brace — a spring type
field intensity near the tip of an ideal crack in a linear support providing a variable restraining force along
elastic medium when deformed so that the crack faces its axis
are displaced apart, normal to the crack plane (opening
mode or mode I deformation). KI is directly proportional welded joint category — the location of a joint in a
to applied load and depends on specimen geometry. vessel used for specifying required examinations. The
Structural Integrity Test — the initial or subsequent categories are designated as A, B, C, and D as defined
pressure test of a containment structure to demonstrate in NE-3351.
the ability to withstand the prescribed loads yield strength (␴y) — the stress at which a material
support — (1) an item used to position components, exhibits a specified limiting deviation from the linear
resist gravity, resist dynamic loading, or maintain equi- proportionality of stress to strain. The deviation is
librium of components; (2) an item that carries the expressed in terms of strain (generally 0.2%).
83

IWB-2411 REQUIREMENTS FOR CLASS 1 COMPONENTS IWB-2420
(b) Following completion of Program A after 40 TABLE IWB-2412-1 98

years, successive inspection intervals shall follow the INSPECTION PROGRAM B
10 year inspection interval of Program B.
Inspection Period,
Calendar Years of Minimum Maximum
Inspection Plant Service Examinations Examinations
Interval Within the Interval Completed, % Credited, %
IWB-2412 Inspection Program B
All 3 16 50
(a) The required percentage of examinations in each 7 501 75
Examination Category shall be completed in accordance 10 100 100
with Table IWB-2412-1, with the following exceptions:
Note:
(1) Examination Categories B-N-1, B-P, and B-Q; (1) If the first period completion percentage for any examination
(2) examinations partially deferred to the end of category exceeds 34%, at least 16% of the required examinations
an inspection interval, as allowed by Examination Cate- shall be performed in the second period.
gories B-A, B-D, and B-F;
(3) examinations deferred to the end of an inspec-
tion interval, as allowed by Examination Categories B-
A, B-L-1, B-M-1, B-N-2, B-N-3, and B-O;
(4) examinations deferred until disassembly of a IWB-2413 Inspection Program for Steam
component for maintenance, repair/replacement activity, Generator Tubing
or volumetric examination, as allowed by Examination The examinations shall be governed by the plant
Categories B-G-1, B-G-2, B-L-2, and B-M-2. Technical Specification.
(5) welded attachments examined as a result of
component support deformation under Examination Cat-
egory B-K.
If there are less than three items or welds to be
examined in an Examination Category, the items or
IWB-2420 SUCCESSIVE INSPECTIONS A00
welds may be examined in any two periods, or in any
one period if there is only one item or weld, in lieu (a) The sequence of component examinations which
of the percentage requirements of Table IWB-2412-1. was established during the first inspection interval shall
(b) If items or welds are added to the Inspection be repeated during each successive inspection interval,
Program, during the service lifetime of a plant, examina- to the extent practical.
tion shall be scheduled as follows: (b) If a component is accepted for continued service
(1) When items or welds are added during the in accordance with IWB-3132.3 or IWB-3142.4, the
first period of an interval, at least 25% of the examina- areas containing flaws or relevant conditions shall be
tions required by the applicable Examination Category reexamined during the next three inspection periods
and Item Number for the added items or welds shall listed in the schedule of the inspection program of
be performed during each of the second and third IWB-2400. Alternatively, acoustic emission may be
periods of that interval. Alternatively, if deferral of the used to monitor growth of existing flaws in accordance
examinations is permitted for the Examination Category with IWA-2234.
and Item Number, the second period examinations may (c) If the reexaminations required by IWB-2420(b)
be deferred to the third period and at least 50% of reveal that the flaws or relevant conditions remain
the examinations required by the applicable Examination essentially unchanged for three successive inspection
Category and Item Number for the added items or periods, the component examination schedule may revert
welds shall be performed during the third period. to the original schedule of successive inspections.
(2) When items or welds are added during the (d) For steam generator tubing, the successive exami-
second period of an interval, at least 25% of the nations shall be governed by the plant Technical Speci-
examinations required by the applicable Examination fication.
Category and Item Number for the added items or (e) If welded attachments are examined as a result
welds shall be performed during the third period of of identified component support deformation, and the
that interval. results of these examinations exceed the acceptance
(3) When items or welds are added during the third standards of Table IWB-3410-1, successive examina-
period of an interval, examinations shall be scheduled in tions shall be performed, if determined necessary, based
accordance with IWB-2412(a) for successive intervals. on an evaluation by the Owner.
93

IWB-2430 1998 SECTION XI, DIVISION 1 IWB-2500
IWB-2430 ADDITIONAL EXAMINATIONS results of these examinations exceed the acceptance

standards of Table IWB-3410-1, additional examinations
(a) Examinations performed in accordance with Table
shall be performed, if determined necessary, based on
IWB-2500-1, except for Examination Category B-P,
an evaluation by the Owner.
that reveal flaws or relevant conditions exceeding the
acceptance standards of Table IWB-3410-1 shall be
extended to include additional examinations during the
current outage. The additional examinations shall in- IWB-2500 EXAMINATION AND PRESSURE
clude an additional number of welds, areas, or parts1 TEST REQUIREMENTS
included in the inspection item2 equal to the number (a) Components shall be examined and tested as
of welds, areas, or parts included in the inspection specified in Table IWB-2500-1. The method of examina-
item that were scheduled to be performed during the tion for the components and parts of the pressure
present inspection period. The additional examinations retaining boundaries shall comply with those tabulated in
shall be selected from welds, areas, or parts of similar Table IWB-2500-1 except where alternate examination
material and service. This additional selection may methods are used that meet the requirements of
require inclusion of piping systems other than the one IWA-2240.
containing the flaws or relevant conditions. (b) Table IWB-2500-1 is organized as follows.
(b) If the additional examinations required by IWB-
2430(a) reveal flaws or relevant conditions exceeding Examination
the acceptance standards of Table IWB-3410-1, the Category Examination Area
examinations shall be further extended to include addi- B-A Pressure Retaining Welds in Reactor Vessel
tional examinations during the current outage. These B-B Pressure Retaining Welds in Vessels Other
additional examinations shall include the remaining Than Reactor Vessels
B-D Full Penetration Welded Nozzles in Vessels
number of welds, areas, or parts of similar material B-F Pressure Retaining Dissimilar Metal Welds
and service subject to the same type of flaws or relevant in Vessel Nozzles
conditions. B-G-1 Pressure Retaining Bolting, Greater Than 2 in.
(c) For the inspection period following the period in Diameter
in which the examinations of IWB-2430(a) or (b) were B-G-2 Pressure Retaining Bolting, 2 in. and Less
in Diameter
completed, the examinations shall be performed as B-J Pressure Retaining Welds in Piping
originally scheduled in accordance with IWB-2400. B-K Welded Attachments for Vessels, Piping, Pumps,
(d) For steam generator tubing, additional examina- and Valves
tions shall be governed by plant Technical Specifica- B-L-1 Pressure Retaining Welds in Pump Casings
tions. B-L-2 Pump Casings
B-M-1 Pressure Retaining Welds in Valve Bodies
(e) If welded attachments are examined as a result B-M-2 Valve Bodies
of identified component support deformation, and the B-N-1 Interior of Reactor Vessel
B-N-2 Welded Core Support Structures and
1 Welds, areas, or parts are those described or intended in a particular Interior Attachments to Reactor Vessels
inspection item of Table IWB-2500-1. B-N-3 Removable Core Support Structures
2 An inspection item, as listed in Table IWB-2500-1, may comprise B-O Pressure Retaining Welds in Control Rod
a number of welds, areas, or parts of a component required to be Housings
examined in accordance with the inspection plan and schedule B-P All Pressure Retaining Components
(IWA-2420). B-Q Steam Generator Tubing
94

TABLE IWB-2500-1 (CONT’D) 98
EXAMINATION CATEGORIES A00
ASME B&PVC
EXAMINATION CATEGORY B-G-1, PRESSURE RETAINING BOLTING, GREATER THAN 2 in. IN DIAMETER
Extent and Frequency of Examination
Examination 1st Successive Deferral of

Item Parts Requirements / Examination Acceptance Inspection Inspection In- Examination to
No. Examined 1 Fig. No. Method Standard Interval 2,3 tervals 2,3 End of Interval
Reactor Vessel All bolts, studs, Same as for 1st

B6.10 Closure Head Nuts Surfaces Visual, VT-1 IWB-3517 nuts, bushings, interval Permissible
B6.20 Closure Studs, in place IWB-2500-12 Volumetric IWB-3515 threads in flange Permissible
B6.30 Closure Studs, when removed IWB-2500-12 Surface or volumetric IWB-3515 stud holes Permissible
B6.40 Threads in Flange IWB-2500-12 Volumetric IWB-3515 Permissible
B6.50 Closure Washers, Bushings Surfaces Visual, VT-1 IWB-3517 Permissible
Pressurizer All bolts, studs, Same as for 1st Permissible

B6.60 Bolts and Studs IWB-2500-12 Volumetric IWB-3515 nuts, bushings interval
B6.70 Flange Surface,4 when Surfaces Visual, VT-1 IWB-3517 and flange
B6.80 connection disassembled Surfaces Visual, VT-1 IWB-3517 surfaces
Nuts, Bushings, and Washers
101
Steam Generators All bolts, studs, Same as for 1st Permissible
SEC11$$U55 05-17-00 17:54:08

B6.90 Bolts and Studs IWB-2500-12 Volumetric IWB-3515 nuts, bushings, interval
REQUIREMENTS FOR CLASS 1 COMPONENTS
Heat Exchangers All bolts, studs, Same as for 1st Permissible

NOTES:
See Notes at end of Examination Category B-G-1.
pd: sec11 Rev 15.04

Table IWB-2500-1
98 TABLE IWB-2500-1 (CONT’D)
EXAMINATION CATEGORIES
EXAMINATION CATEGORY B-G-1, PRESSURE RETAINING BOLTING, GREATER THAN 2 in. IN DIAMETER (CONT’D)
ASME B&PVC
Table IWB-2500-1
Examination 1st Deferral of

Item Parts Requirements / Examination Acceptance Inspection Successive Examination to
No. Examined 1 Fig. No. Method Standard Interval 2,3 Inspection Intervals2,3 End of Interval
Piping All bolts, studs, Same as for 1st Permissible
B6.160 Flange Surface,4 when connection Surfaces Visual, VT-1 IWB-3517 and flange
B6.170 disassembled Surfaces Visual, VT-1 IWB-3517 surfaces
Pumps All bolts, studs, Same as for 1st Permissible

102
Valves All bolts, studs, Same as for 1st Permissible
SEC11$$U55 05-17-00 17:54:08

1998 SECTION XI, DIVISION 1

NOTES:
(1) Bolting may be examined:
(a) in place under tension;
(b) when the connection is disassembled;
(c) when the bolting is removed.
(2) Bushings and threads in base material of flanges are required to be examined only when the connections are disassembled. Bushings may
be inspected in place.
(3) For heat exchangers, piping, pumps, and valves, examinations are limited to components selected for examination under Examination
Categories B-B, B-J, B-L-2, and B-M-2.
(4) Examination includes 1 in. annular surface of flange surrounding each stud.
pd: sec11 Rev 15.04

TABLE IWB-2500-1 (CONT’D)
ASME B&PVC
EXAMINATION CATEGORY B-K, WELDED ATTACHMENTS FOR VESSELS, PIPING, PUMPS, AND VALVES
Extent2,3 and Frequency6

of Examination

No. Examined1 Fig. No. Method Standard Interval Inspection Intervals End of Interval
Pressure Vessels
B10.10 Welded Attachments IWB-2500-13, Surface7 IWB-3516 Each welded attach- Same as for 1st Not permissible
-14, and -15 ment and each iden- interval
tified occurrence4
Piping
B10.20 Welded Attachments IWB-2500-13, Surface IWB-3516 Each welded attach- Same as for 1st Not permissible
tified occurrence5
Pumps
tified occurrence5
105
Valves
SEC11$$U55 05-17-00 17:54:08

tified occurrence5
NOTES:
(1) Weld buildup on nozzles that is in compression under normal conditions and provides only component support is excluded from examination.
Examination is limited to those welded attachments that meet the following conditions:
(a) the attachment is on the outside surface of the pressure retaining component;
(b) the attachment provides component support as defined in NF-1110;

(c) the attachment weld joins the attachment either directly to the surface of the component or to an integrally cast or forged attachment
to the component, and
(d) the attachment weld is full penetration fillet, or partial penetration, continuous or intermittent.
(2) The extent of the examination includes essentially 100% of the length of the attachment weld at each attachment subject to examination.
(3) Selected samples of welded attachments shall be examined each inspection interval.
(4) For multiple vessels of similar design, function and service, only one welded attachment of only one of the multiple vessels shall be selected
for examination.
(5) For piping, pumps, and valves, a sample of 10% of the welded attachments associated with the component supports selected for examination
under IWF-2510 shall be examined.
(6) Examination is required whenever component support member deformation, e.g., broken, bent, or pulled out parts, is identified during
operation, refueling, maintenance, examination, or testing.
(7) For the configurations shown in Figs. IWB-2500-13 and IWB-2500-14, a surface examination from an accessible side of the attachment
weld shall be performed. Alternatively, for the configuration shown in Fig. IWB-2500-14, a volumetric examination of volume A-B-C-D
from an accessible side of the attachment weld may be performed in lieu of the surface examination of surfaces A-B or C-D.
pd: sec11 Rev 15.04

Table IWB-2500-1
TABLE IWB-2500-1 (CONT’D) A00
ASME B&PVC
EXAMINATION CATEGORY B-L-1, PRESSURE RETAINING WELDS IN PUMP CASINGS; B-M-1, PRESSURE RETAINING
WELDS IN VALVE BODIES; B-L-2, PUMP CASINGS; B-M-2, VALVE BODIES
Table IWB-2500-1

No. Examined Fig. No. Method Standard Interval Inspection Intervals End of Interval
Pumps
B12.10 Pump Casing Welds (B-L-1) IWB-2500-16 Visual, VT-1 IWB-3518 All welds1,4 Same as for 1st Permissible
interval
B12.20 Pump Casing (B-L-2) Internal Visual, VT-3 IWB-3519 Internal surface1 Same as for 1st See Note 2
surfaces interval
Valves
B12.30 Valves, Less Than NPS 4
Valve Body Welds (B-M-1) IWB-2500-17 Surface WIB-3518 All welds3,4 Same as for 1st Permissible
interval
106
B12.40 Valves, NPS 4 or Larger
Valve Body Welds (B-M-1) IWB-2500-17 Volumetric IWB-3518 All welds3,4 Same as for 1st Permissible
interval
SEC11$$U55 05-17-00 17:54:08

B12.50 Valve Body, Exceeding NPS 4 Internal Visual, VT-3 IWB-3519 Internal surface3 Same as for 1st See Note 2
(B-M-2) surfaces interval

NOTES:
(1) Examinations are limited to at least one pump in each group of pumps performing similar functions in the system, e.g., recirculating
coolant pumps.
(2) Examination is required only when a pump or valve is disassembled for maintenance, repair, or volumetric examination. Examination
of the internal pressure boundary shall include the internal pressure retaining surfaces made accessible for examination by disassembly.
If a partial examination is performed and a subsequent disassembly of that pump or valve allows a more extensive examination, an
examination shall be performed during the subsequent disassembly. A complete examination is required only once during the interval.
(3) Examinations are limited to at least one valve within each group of valves that are of the same size, constructural design (such as
globe, gate, or check valves), and manufacturing method, and that perform similar functions in the system (such as containment
isolation and system overpressure protection).
(4) Includes essentially 100% of weld length.
pd: sec11 Rev 15.04

ASME B&PVC
EXAMINATION CATEGORY B-N-1, INTERIOR OF REACTOR VESSEL
B-N-2, WELDED CORE SUPPORT STRUCTURES AND INTERIOR ATTACHMENTS TO REACTOR VESSELS
B-N-3, REMOVABLE CORE SUPPORT STRUCTURES

Reactor Vessel
B13.10 Vessel Interior (B-N-1) Accessible Visual, VT-3 IWB-3520.2 Refueling outages3 Each inspection period Not permissible
areas1
Reactor Vessel (BWR)

B13.20 Interior Attachments Within Beltline Accessible Visual, VT-1 IWB-3520.1 Welds Same as for 1st Permissible
Region (B-N-2) welds interval
B13.30 Interior Attachments Beyond Accessible Visual, VT-3 IWB-3520.2 Welds Same as for 1st Permissible
Beltline Region (B-N-2) welds interval
107
B13.40 Core Support Structure (B-N-2) Accessible Visual, VT-3 IWB-3520.2 Surfaces Same as for 1st Permissible
surfaces interval
SEC11$$U55 05-17-00 17:54:08

Reactor Vessel (PWR)
B13.50 Interior Attachments Within Beltline Accessible Visual, VT-1 IWB-3520.1 Welds Same as for 1st Permissible
Region (B-N-2) welds interval
B13.60 Interior Attachments Beyond Accessible Visual, VT-3 IWB-3520.2 Welds Same as for 1st Permissible

Beltline Region (B-N-2) welds interval
B13.70 Core Support Structure2 (B-N-3) Accessible Visual, VT-3 IWB-3520.3 Surfaces Same as for 1st Permissible
surfaces interval
NOTES:
(1) Areas to be examined shall include the spaces above and below the reactor core that are made accessible for examination by removal of
components during normal refueling outages.
(2) The structure shall be removed from the reactor vessel for examination.
(3) At 1st refueling outage, and subsequent refueling outages at approximately 3 year intervals.
pd: sec11 Rev 15.04

Table IWB-2500-1
EXAMINATION CATEGORY B-O, PRESSURE RETAINING WELDS IN CONTROL ROD HOUSINGS
ASME B&PVC
Table IWB-2500-1

Reactor Vessel
B14.10 Welds in CRD Housing IWB-2500-18 Volumetric or surface IWB-3523 10% peripheral CRD Same as for 1st Permissible
housings interval
108
SEC11$$U55 05-17-00 17:54:08


pd: sec11 Rev 15.04
REQUIREMENTS FOR CLASS 1 COMPONENTS Fig. IWB-2500-11
FIG. IWB-2500-11 PIPE BRANCH CONNECTION
125

Fig. IWB-2500-12 1998 SECTION XI, DIVISION 1
A00 FIG. IWB-2500-12 CLOSURE STUD AND THREADS IN FLANGE STUD HOLE
126

REQUIREMENTS FOR CLASS 1 COMPONENTS Fig. IWB-2500-15
FIG. IWB-2500-15 WELDED ATTACHMENT

Note: Examination of surface areas may be limited to the portions of these areas that are accessible without removal
of support members.
129

Fig. IWB-2500-16 1998 SECTION XI, DIVISION 1
A00 FIG. IWB-2500-16 PUMP CASING WELD

[Type F Pump (Section III)]
130

IWB-3122.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR CLASS 1 COMPONENTS IWB-3133
(b) A component whose visual examination detects (b) When flaws are detected by a required volumetric
the relevant conditions described in the standards of or surface examination, the component is acceptable
Table IWB-3410-1 shall be unacceptable for service, for continued service provided the requirements of
unless such components meet the requirements of IWB- IWB-3112(b) or the acceptance standards of Table
3122.2 or IWB-3122.3 prior to placement of the compo- IWB-3410-1 are met.
nent in service. (c) Volumetric and surface examination results shall
be compared with recorded results of the preservice
IWB-3122.2 Acceptance by Supplemental Exami-
examination and prior inservice examinations. Accept-
nation. A component containing relevant conditions
ance of the components for continued service shall be in
shall be acceptable for service if the results of supple-
accordance with IWB-3132, IWB-3133, and IWB-3134.
mental examinations (IWB-3200) meet the requirements
of IWB-3110.
IWB-3132 Acceptance
IWB-3122.3 Acceptance by Corrective Measures
or Repair / Replacement Activity. A component con- IWB-3132.1 Acceptance by Volumetric or Surface
taining relevant conditions is acceptable for service Examination. A component whose volumetric or sur-
if the relevant conditions are corrected by a repair / face examination either reconfirms the absence of flaws
replacement activity or by corrective measures to the or detects flaws that are acceptable under the provisions
extent necessary to meet the acceptance standards of of IWB-3131(b) are acceptable for continued service.
Table IWB-3410-1. Confirmed changes in flaws from prior examinations
shall be recorded in accordance with IWA-1400(h),
IWA-2220(b), and IWA-6230. A component that does
not meet the acceptance standards of Table IWB-3410-
IWB-3123 Repair / Replacement Activity and 1 shall be corrected in accordance with the provisions
Reexamination of IWB-3132.2 or IWB-3132.3.
The repair / replacement activity and reexamination IWB-3132.2 Acceptance by Repair / Replacement
shall comply with the requirements of IWA-4000. Reex- Activity. A component whose volumetric or surface
amination shall be conducted in accordance with the examination detects flaws that exceed the acceptance
requirements of IWA-2200; the recorded results shall standards of Table IWB-3410-1 is unacceptable for
demonstrate that the area subjected to the repair / replace- continued service until the additional examination re-
ment activity meets the acceptance standards of Table quirements of IWB-2430 are satisfied and the component
IWB-3410-1. is corrected by a repair / replacement activity to the
extent necessary to meet the acceptance standards of
IWB-3000.
IWB-3124 Review by Authorities
(a) The Repair / Replacement Program and the reex-
amination results shall be subject to review by the IWB-3132.3 Acceptance by Analytical Evaluation.
enforcement authorities having jurisdiction at the A component whose volumetric or surface examination
plant site. detects flaws that exceed the acceptance standards of
(b) Evaluation of examination results may be subject Table IWB-3410-1 is acceptable for continued service
to review by the regulatory authority having jurisdiction without a repair / replacement activity if an analytical
at the plant site. evaluation, as described in IWB-3600, meets the accept-
ance criteria of IWB-3600. The area containing the
flaw shall be subsequently reexamined in accordance
IWB-3130 INSERVICE VOLUMETRIC AND with IWB-2420(b) and (c).
SURFACE EXAMINATIONS
IWB-3131 General IWB-3133 Repair / Replacement Activity and
Reexamination
(a) The volumetric and surface examinations required
by IWB-2500 and performed in accordance with IWA- The repair / replacement activity and reexamination
2200 shall be evaluated by comparing the examination shall comply with the requirements of IWA-4000. Reex-
results with the acceptance standards specified in Table amination shall be conducted in accordance with the
IWB-3410-1, except where IWB-3131(b) is applicable. requirements of IWA-2200. The recorded results shall
135

IWB-3133 1998 SECTION XI, DIVISION 1 IWB-3200
demonstrate that the area subjected to the repair / replace- IWB-3142.4 Acceptance by Analytical Evaluation.
ment activity meets the acceptance standards of Table A component containing relevant conditions is accept-
IWB-3410-1. able for continued service if an analytical evaluation
demonstrates the component’s acceptability. The evalua-
tion analysis and evaluation acceptance criteria shall
A00 IWB-3134 Review by Authorities be specified by the Owner. A component accepted for
(a) The Repair / Replacement Program and the reex- continued service based on analytical evaluation shall
amination results shall be subject to review by the be subsequently examined in accordance with IWB-
enforcement authorities having jurisdiction at the 2420(b) and (c).
plant site.
(b) Analytical evaluation of examination results as
required by IWB-3132.3 shall be submitted to the
regulatory authority having jurisdiction at the plant site.
IWB-3143 Repair / Replacement Activity and

Reexamination
IWB-3140 INSERVICE VISUAL
EXAMINATIONS The repair / replacement activity and reexamination
shall comply with the requirements of IWA-4000. Reex-
IWB-3141 General
amination shall be conducted in accordance with the
(a) The visual examinations required by IWB-2500 requirements of IWA-2200. The recorded results shall
and performed in accordance with IWA-2200 shall be demonstrate that the area subjected to the repair / replace-
evaluated by comparing the examination results with ment activity meets the acceptance standards of Table
the acceptance standards specified in Table IWB-3410-1. IWB-3410-1.
(b) Acceptance of components for continued service
shall be in accordance with IWB-3142, IWB-3143, and
IWB-3144.
IWB-3144 Review by Authorities
IWB-3142 Acceptance (a) The Repair / Replacement Program and the reexam-
ination results shall be subject to review by the enforce-
IWB-3142.1 Acceptance by Visual Examination ment authorities having jurisdiction at the plant site.
(a) A component whose visual examination confirms (b) Evaluation analyses of examination results as
the absence of the relevant conditions described in the required by IWB-3142.4 shall be submitted to the
standards of Table IWB-3410-1 shall be acceptable for regulatory authority having jurisdiction at the plant site.
continued service.
(b) A component whose visual examination detects
the relevant conditions described in the standards of
Table IWB-3410-1 shall be unacceptable for continued
service, unless such components meet the requirements
of IWB-3142.2, IWB-3142.3, or IWB-3142.4.
IWB-3200 SUPPLEMENTAL
EXAMINATIONS
IWB-3142.2 Acceptance by Supplemental Exami-
(a) Volumetric or surface examinations that detect
nation. A component containing relevant conditions
flaws which require evaluation in accordance with the
shall be acceptable for continued service if the results
requirements of IWB-3100 may be supplemented by
of supplemental examinations (IWB-3200) meet the
other examination methods and techniques (IWA-2240)
requirements of IWB-3130.
to determine the character of the flaw (i.e., size, shape,
IWB-3142.3 Acceptance by Corrective Measures and orientation).
or Repair / Replacement Activity. A component con- (b) Visual examinations that detect relevant condi-
taining relevant conditions is acceptable for continued tions described in the standards of this Article may be
service if the relevant conditions are corrected by a supplemented by surface or volumetric examinations
repair / replacement activity or by corrective measures to determine the extent of the unacceptable conditions
to the extent necessary to meet the acceptance standards and the need for corrective measures, analytical evalua-
of Table IWB-3410-1. tion or repair / replacement activities.
136

IWB-3730 REQUIREMENTS FOR CLASS 1 COMPONENTS IWB-3740
against ductile failure. Appendix K contains procedures

that may be used to demonstrate protection against
ductile failure.
(c) The procedures used to define protection against
failure due to the presence of postulated flaws shall
be the responsibility of the Owner and shall be subject
to acceptance by the regulatory authority having jurisdic-
tion at the plant site.
IWB-3740 OPERATING PLANT FATIGUE

ASSESSMENTS
(a) Appendix L provides procedures that may be
used to assess the effects of thermal and mechanical
fatigue concerns on component acceptability for contin-
ued service.
(b) Appendix L provides procedures that may also
be used when the calculated fatigue usage exceeds the
fatigue usage limit defined in the original Construc-
tion Code.
157

ARTICLE IWB-5000
IWB-5200 SYSTEM TEST REQUIREMENTS Table IWB-5230-1 A00

TEST PRESSURE
IWB-5210 TEST
Test Temperature, °F Test Pressure1,2
(a) Pressure retaining components shall be tested at
the frequency stated in, and visually examined by the 100 or less 1.10Po
method specified in Table IWB-2500-1, Examination 200 1.08Po
300 1.06Po
Category B-P.
400 1.04Po
(b) The system pressure tests and visual examinations 500 or greater 1.02Po
shall be conducted in accordance with IWA-5000 and
NOTES:
this Article. The contained fluid in the system shall (1) Po is the reactor pressure corresponding to 100% rated reac-
serve as the pressurizing medium. tor power.
(2) Linear interpolation at intermediate test temperatures is permis-
sible.
IWB-5220 SYSTEM LEAKAGE TEST

A00 IWB-5221 Pressure
(a) The system leakage test shall be conducted at a ing to the selected test temperature, provided the require-
pressure not less than the pressure corresponding to ments of IWB-5240 are met for all ferritic steel compo-
100% rated reactor power. nents within the boundary of the system (or portion
(b) The system test pressure and temperature shall of system) subject to the test pressure (see IWA-5245).
be attained at a rate in accordance with the heat-up (b) Whenever a hydrostatic test is conducted in which
limitations specified for the system. the reactor vessel contains nuclear fuel and the vessel
is within the system test boundary, the test pressure
shall not exceed the limiting conditions specified in
IWB-5222 Boundaries the plant Technical Specifications.
(a) The pressure retaining boundary during the sys-
tem leakage test shall correspond to the reactor coolant
boundary, with all valves in the position required for
normal reactor operation startup. The visual examination IWB-5240 TEMPERATURE
shall, however, extend to and include the second closed (a) The minimum test temperature for either the
valve at the boundary extremity. system leakage or system hydrostatic test shall not be
(b) The pressure retaining boundary during the sys- lower than the minimum temperature for the associated
tem leakage test conducted at or near the end of each pressure specified in the plant Technical Specifications.
inspection interval shall extend to all Class 1 pressure (b) The system test temperature shall be modified
retaining components within the system boundary. as required by the results obtained from each set of
material surveillance specimens withdrawn from the
IWB-5230 HYDROSTATIC TEST
reactor vessel during the service lifetime.
(a) The hydrostatic test may be conducted at any (c) For tests of systems or portions of systems con-
test pressure specified in Table IWB-5230-1 correspond- structed entirely of austenitic steel, test temperature
158

IWC-2412 REQUIREMENTS FOR CLASS 2 COMPONENTS IWC-2500
98 TABLE IWC-2412-1 IWC-2430 ADDITIONAL EXAMINATIONS

INSPECTION PROGRAM B
(a) Examinations performed in accordance with Table
Inspection IWC-2500-1, except for Examination Category C-H,
Period, that reveal flaws or relevant conditions exceeding the
Calendar Years of acceptance standards of Table IWC-3410-1 shall be
Plant Service Minimum Maximum
extended to include additional examinations during the
Inspection Within the Examinations Examinations
Interval Interval Completed, % Credited, % current outage. The additional examinations shall in-
clude an additional number of welds, areas, or parts1
All 3 16 50 included in the inspection item2 equal to 20% of the
7 501 75
10 100 100
number of welds, areas, or parts included in the inspec-
tion item that are scheduled to be performed during
Note: the interval. The additional examinations shall be se-
(1) If the first period completion percentage for any examination
category exceeds 34%, at least 16% of the required examinations lected from welds, areas, or parts of similar material
shall be performed in the second period. and service. This additional selection may require inclu-
sion of piping systems other than the one containing
the flaws or relevant conditions.
and Item Number for the added items or welds shall (b) If the additional examinations required by IWC-
be performed during each of the second and third 2430(a) reveal flaws or relevant conditions exceeding the
periods of that interval. acceptance standards of Table IWC-3410-1, the examina-
(2) When items or welds are added during the second tions shall be further extended to include additional exami-
period of an interval, at least 25% of the examinations re- nations during the current outage. These additional exami-
quired by the applicable Examination Category and Item nations shall include the remaining number of welds, areas,
Number for the added items or welds shall be performed or parts of similar material and service subject to the same
during the third period of that interval. type of flaws or relevant conditions.
(3) When items or welds are added during the third (c) For the inspection period following the period
period of an interval, examinations shall be scheduled in in which the examinations of IWC-2430(a) or (b) were
accordance with IWC-2412(a) for successive intervals. completed, the examinations shall be performed as
originally scheduled in accordance with IWC-2400.
(d) If welded attachments are examined as a result
A00 IWC-2420 SUCCESSIVE INSPECTIONS of identified component support deformation and the
results of these examinations exceed the acceptance
(a) The sequence of component examinations which
standards of Table IWC-3410-1 additional examinations
was established during the first inspection interval shall
shall be performed, if determined necessary, based on
be repeated during each successive inspection interval,
an evaluation by the Owner.
to the extent practical.
(b) If a component is accepted for continued service
in accordance with IWC-3122.3 or IWC-3132.3, the
areas containing flaws or relevant conditions shall be IWC-2500 EXAMINATION AND PRESSURE
reexamined during the next inspection period listed in TEST REQUIREMENTS
the schedule of the inspection programs of IWC-2400.
(a) Components shall be examined and pressure
Alternatively, acoustic emission may be used to monitor
tested as specified in Table IWC-2500-1. The method
growth of existing flaws in accordance with IWA-2234.
of examination for the components and parts of the
(c) If the reexaminations required by IWC-2420(b)
pressure retaining boundaries shall comply with those
reveal that the flaws or relevant conditions remain
tabulated in Table IWC-2500-1, except where alternate
essentially unchanged for the next inspection period,
examination methods are used that meet the require-
the component examination schedule may revert to the
ments of IWA-2240.
original schedule of successive inspections.
(d) If welded attachments are examined as a result
of identified component support deformation and the 1 Welds, areas, or parts are those described or intended in a particular
results of these examinations exceed the acceptance inspection item of Table IWC-2500-1.
2 An inspection item, as listed in Table IWC-2500-1, may comprise
standards of Table IWC-3410-1 successive examinations
a number of welds, areas, or parts of a component required to be
shall be performed, if determined necessary, based on examined in accordance with the inspection plan and schedule
an evaluation by the Owner. (IWA-2420).
167

IWC-2500 1998 SECTION XI, DIVISION 1 IWC-2500
(b) Table IWC-2500-1 is organized as follows.

Examination
Category Examination Area
C-A Pressure Retaining Welds in Pressure Vessels
C-B Pressure Retaining Nozzle Welds in Vessels
C-C Welded Attachments for Vessels, Piping,
Pumps, and Valves
C-D Pressure Retaining Bolting Greater Than 2 in.
in Diameter
C-F-1 Pressure Retaining Welds in Austenitic
Stainless Steel or High Alloy Piping
C-F-2 Pressure Retaining Welds in Carbon or
Low Alloy Steel Piping
C-G Pressure Retaining Welds in Pumps and Valves
C-H All Pressure Retaining Components
168

TABLE IWC-2500-1 (CONT’D) A00
ASME B&PVC
EXAMINATION CATEGORY C-G, PRESSURE RETAINING WELDS IN PUMPS AND VALVES
Examination
Item Requirements / Examination Acceptance Frequency of
No. Parts Examined Fig. No. Method Standard Extent of Examination Examination3
Pumps
C6.10 Pump Casing Welds2 IWC-2500-8 Surface IWC-3515 100% welds in all components1 Each inspection
in each piping run examined interval
under Examination
Category C-F
Valves
C6.20 Valve Body Welds2 IWC-2500-8 Surface IWC-3515 100% welds in all components1 Each inspection
in each piping run examined interval
under Examination
Category C-F
177
SEC11$$U75 05-16-00 15:44:14

[This is electronic file SEC11$$U75 page #177

NOTES:
(1) In case of multiple pumps or valves of similar design, size, function, and service in a system, required weld examinations may be limited to all the welds in one
pump or one valve in the same group or distributed among any of the pumps or valves of that same group.
(2) The examination may be performed from either the inside or outside surface of the component.
(3) The pumps and valves initially selected for examination shall be reexamined in the same sequence over the service lifetime of the component, to the extent practical.
pd: sec11 Rev 15.04

Table IWC-2500-1
ASME B&PVC
Table IWC-2500-1
TABLE IWC-2500-1 (CONT’D)

EXAMINATION CATEGORY C-H, ALL PRESSURE RETAINING COMPONENTS
Item Test Examination Acceptance Frequency of

No. Parts Examined Requirement Method1 Standard Extent of Examination Examination
C7.10 Pressure retaining components System leakage Visual, VT-2 IWC-3516 Pressure retaining boundary Each inspection
test (IWC-5220) period
178
NOTES:
(1) Visual examination of IWA-5240.
SEC11$$U75 05-16-00 15:44:14

[This is electronic SEC11$$U75 page #178

pd: sec11 Rev 15.04
IWC-3134 REQUIREMENTS FOR CLASS 2 COMPONENTS IWC-3510.4
IWC-3134 Review by Authorities IWC-3500 ACCEPTANCE STANDARDS

(a) The Repair /Replacement Program and the reex-
IWC-3510 STANDARDS FOR EXAMINATION
amination results shall be subject to review by the
CATEGORY C-A, PRESSURE
enforcement authorities having jurisdiction at the
plant site. RETAINING WELDS IN
(b) Evaluation analyses of examination results as PRESSURE VESSELS
required by IWC-3132.3 shall be submitted to the
regulatory authority having jurisdiction at the plant site. IWC-3510.1 Allowable Planar Flaws
(a) The size of allowable planar flaws within the
boundary of the examination volumes specified in Figs.
IWC-2500-1 and IWC-2500-2 shall not exceed the
IWC-3200 SUPPLEMENTAL limits specified in Table IWC-3510-1.
EXAMINATIONS (b) Where a flaw extends beyond the examination
(a) Examinations that detect flaws that require evalua- volumes, or separate flaws lie both within and beyond
tion in accordance with the requirements of IWC-3100 the boundaries but are characterized as a single flaw
may be supplemented by other examination methods by IWA-3400, the overall size of the flaw shall not
and techniques (IWA-2240) to determine the character exceed the limits specified in Table IWC-3510-1.
of the flaw (i.e., size, shape, and orientation). (c) Any two or more coplanar aligned flaws character-
(b) Visual examinations that detect relevant condi- ized as separate flaws by IWA-3330 are allowable,
tions may be supplemented by other examinations provided the requirements of IWA-3390 are met.
(IWA-2220, IWA-2230, or IWA-2240) to determine
the need for corrective measures, analytical evaluation,
or repair /replacement activities.
IWC-3510.2 Allowable Laminar Flaws. The areas
of allowable laminar flaws within the boundary of the
examination zone delineated in the applicable figures
IWC-3400 STANDARDS specified in IWC-3510.1(a) shall not exceed the limits
IWC-3410 ACCEPTANCE STANDARDS specified in Table IWC-3510-2.
The acceptance standards referenced in Table IWC-
3410-1 shall be applied to determine acceptability for
service. The following conditions shall apply. IWC-3510.3 Conditionally Allowable Laminar
Flaws
IWC-3410.1 Applications of Standards. The accept-
(a) Laminar flaws that exceed the standards specified
ance standards for ferritic steel components shall only
in IWC-3510.2 shall be considered conditionally allow-
be applicable to those components whose material
able laminar flaws. In such cases, these laminar flaws
properties are in accordance with those stated in the
shall be included as additional areas of the component
referenced table.
subject to examination under the applicable examination
categories of Table IWC-2500-1.
(b) Laminar flaws that join with a planar flaw shall
IWC-3420 CHARACTERIZATION
be governed by the standards of IWC-3510.1.
Each detected flaw or group of flaws shall be charac-
terized by the rules of IWA-3300 to establish the
dimensions of the flaws. These dimensions shall be
IWC-3510.4 Allowable Linear Flaws
used in conjunction with the acceptance standards of
(a) The size of allowable linear flaws as detected
IWC-3500.
by either a surface examination (MT /PT) or volumetric
examination (RT) within the boundary of the examina-
tion volumes shown in Figs. IWC-2500-1 and IWC-
IWC-3430 ACCEPTABILITY 2500-2 and within the boundaries of the examination
Flaws that do not exceed the dimensions of allowable surfaces shown in Fig. IWC-2500-5 [see IWC-
flaws of IWC-3500 for the respective examination 3512.1(a)] shall not exceed the limits specified in Table
category shall be acceptable. IWC-3510-3.
195

Table IWC-3410-1 1998 SECTION XI, DIVISION 1 Table IWC-3510-1
TABLE IWC-3410-1
ACCEPTANCE STANDARDS
Examination Component and Acceptance

Category Part Examined Standard
C-A Welds in pressure vessels IWC-3510
C-B Vessel nozzle welds IWC-3511
C-C Welded attachments for vessels, IWC-3512
piping, pumps, and valves
C-D Bolting IWC-3513
C-F-1, C-F-2 Welds in piping IWC-3514
C-G Welds in pumps and valves IWC-3515
C-H Pressure retaining components IWC-3516
A00 TABLE IWC-3510-1

ALLOWABLE PLANAR FLAWS
Material: Ferritic steels that meet the requirements of NC-2300 and
with specified minimum yield strength of 50 ksi or less at 100°F
Thickness, t, in.1,2
≤0.5 2.5 ≥4.0 ≤0.5 2.5 ≥4.0
Aspect Surface Surface Surface Subsurface Subsurface Subsurface

Ratio,1 Flaw, Flaw, Flaw, Flaw,3,4 Flaw,3,4 Flaw,3,4
a/艎 a /t, % a /t, % a /t, % a /t, % a /t, % a /t, %
0.00 5.4 3.1 1.9 5.9Y 3.4Y 2.0Y
0.05 5.7 3.3 2.0 6.6Y 3.8Y 2.2Y
0.10 6.2 3.6 2.2 7.4Y 4.3Y 2.5Y
0.15 7.1 4.1 2.5 8.5Y 4.9Y 2.9Y
0.20 8.1 4.7 2.8 9.9Y 5.7Y 3.3Y
0.25 9.5 5.5 3.3 11.4Y 6.6Y 3.8Y
0.30 11.1 6.4 3.8 13.5Y 7.8Y 4.4Y
0.35 12.8 7.4 4.4 15.6Y 9.0Y 5.1Y
0.40 14.4 8.3 5.0 18.2Y 10.5Y 5.8Y
0.45 14.7 8.5 5.1 21.3Y 12.3Y 6.7Y
0.50 15.1 8.7 5.2 24.8Y 14.3Y 7.6Y
NOTES:
(1) Dimensions of a and ᐉ are defined in IWA-3300. For intermediate flaw aspect ratios a / ᐉ and tickness t, linear interpolation is permissible.
Refer to IWA-3200(b).
(2) Component thickness, t, is measured normal to the pressure retaining surface of the component. Where the section thickness varies, the
average thickness over the length of the planar flaw is the component thickness.
(3) The total depth of a subsurface flaw is 2 a.
(4) Y p (S /t )(a /t ) p S /a. If Y ≤ 0.4, the flaw is classified as a surface flaw. If Y > 1.0, use Y p 1.0.
196

[This is electronic SEC11$$U80 page #196
IWC-3513.2 REQUIREMENTS FOR CLASS 2 COMPONENTS IWC-3610
IWC-3513.2 Allowable Flaws for Surface Exami- TABLE IWC-3513-1

nations of Studs and Bolts. Allowable surface flaws in ALLOWABLE PLANAR FLAWS
pressure retaining bolting shall not exceed the following Material: SA-193, SA-320, SA-354, SA-540 that meet
limits: the requirements of NC-2333 and the specified minimum
yield strength between 95 and 130 ksi at 100°F
(a) nonaxial flaws, 1⁄4 in. (6 mm) in length
(b) axial flaws, 1 in. (25 mm) in length Diameter Range: Nominal Sizes Greater
Than 2 in.
IWC-3514 Standards for Examination Category Aspect Subsurface2

Ratio,1 a/ 艎 Flaws, a, in.
C-F-1, Pressure Retaining Welds in
Austenitic Stainless Steel or High 0.0 0.075
Alloy Piping, and C-F-2, Pressure 0.10 0.075
0.20 0.10
Retaining Welds in Carbon or Low 0.30 0.10
Alloy Steel Piping 0.40 0.15
0.50 0.18
These standards are in the course of preparation.
The standards of IWB-3514 may be applied. NOTES:
(1) Dimensions a and ᐉ are defined in IWA-3300. For intermediate
flaw aspect ratios a/ ᐉ, linear interpolation is permissible. Refer
to IWA-3200(b).
IWC-3515 Standards for Examination Category (2) The total depth of an allowable subsurface flaw is twice the
C-G, Pressure Retaining Welds in listed value.
Pumps and Valves
These standards are in the course of preparation.
The standards of IWB-3518 may be applied.
IWC-3600 ANALYTICAL EVALUATION
OF FLAWS
IWC-3516 Standards for Examination Category
C-H, All Pressure Retaining IWC-3610 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA FOR
Components FERRITIC COMPONENTS
These standards are in the course of preparation. These criteria are in the course of preparation. In
The standards of IWB-3522 may be applied. the interim, the criteria of IWB-3610 may be applied.
199

ARTICLE IWC-5000
IWC-5200 SYSTEM TEST REQUIREMENTS IWC-5230 HYDROSTATIC TEST 98
IWC-5210 TEST (a) The hydrostatic test pressure shall be at least

1.10 times the system pressure Psv for systems with
(a) Pressure retaining components shall be tested at
Design Temperature of 200°F (93°C) or less, and at
the frequency stated in, and visually examined by the
least 1.25 times the system pressure Psv for systems
methods specified in Table IWC-2500-1, Examination
Category C-H: with Design Temperature above 200°F (93°C). The
(b)(1) The system pressure tests and visual examina- system pressure Psv shall be the lowest pressure setting
tions shall be conducted in accordance with IWA-5000 among the number of safety or relief valves provided
and this Article. The contained fluid in the system for overpressure protection within the boundary of the
shall serve as the pressurizing medium. system to be tested. For systems (or portions of systems)
(2) Alternatively, steam systems may use either not provided with safety or relief valves, the system
water or gas as the pressurizing medium. When gas design pressure Pd shall be substituted for Psv.
is the pressurizing medium, the test procedure shall (b) The test pressure for a pneumatic test conducted
include methods for detection and location of through- in accordance with IWA-5211(c) shall be the system
wall leakage from components of the system tested. leakage test pressure of IWC-5221.
(c) In the case of atmospheric storage tanks, the
nominal hydrostatic pressure, developed with the tank
filled to its design capacity, shall be acceptable as the
IWC-5220 SYSTEM LEAKAGE TEST system test pressure.
(d) For 0–15 psi (0–103 kPa) storage tanks, the test
A00 IWC-5221 Pressure
pressure shall be 1.1 PG, Design Pressure of vapor or
The system leakage test shall be conducted at the gas space above liquid level for which overpressure
system pressure obtained while the system, or portion protection is provided by relief valves.
of the system, is in service performing its normal (e) The hydrostatic test of the Class 2 portion of
operating function or at the system pressure developed the Main Steam System in Boiling Water Reactor
during a test conducted to verify system operability (BWR) plants may be performed in conjunction with
(e.g., to demonstrate system safety function or satisfy the hydrostatic test of the Class 1 portion, when the
technical specification surveillance requirements). Class 2 portion is not capable of being isolated from
the Class 1 portion by the boundary valve. The hydro-
static test of the Class 2 portion shall meet the require-
IWC-5222 Boundaries ments of IWA-5000 and IWB-5230.
(a) The pressure retaining boundary includes only (f) For the purpose of the test, open ended portions
those portions of the system required to operate or of a suction or drain line from a storage tank extending
support the safety function up to and including the to the first shutoff valve shall be considered as an
first normally closed valve (including a safety or relief extension of the storage tank.
valve) or valve capable of automatic closure when the (g) For open ended portions of discharge lines beyond
safety function is required. the last shutoff valve in nonclosed systems (e.g., contain-
(b) Items outside the boundaries of IWC-5222(a), ment spray header), demonstration of an open flow
and open ended discharge piping, are excluded from path test shall be performed in lieu of the system
the examination requirements. hydrostatic test.
200

ARTICLE IWD-3000
ACCEPTANCE STANDARDS
This Article is in the course of preparation.

The rules of IWB-3000 may be used.
211
ASME B&PVC SEC11$U100 04-07-00 13:36:35 pd: sec11 Rev 15.03

[This is electronic file SEC11$$100 page #211
ARTICLE IWD-5000
IWD-5200 SYSTEM TEST REQUIREMENTS (b) The test presure for a pneumatic test conducted
in accordance with IWA-5211(c) shall be the system
IWD-5210 TEST
leakage test pressure of IWC-5221.
(a) Pressure retaining components shall be tested at (c) In the case of atmospheric storage tanks, the
the frequency stated in, and visually examined by the hydrostatic head, developed with the tank filled to its
methods specified in Table IWD-2500-1, Examination design capacity, shall be acceptable as the test pressure.
Category D-B: (d) For 0–15 psi (0–103 kPa) storage tanks, the test
(1) System Leakage Test, IWA-5211(a) pressure shall be 1.1PG, Design Pressure of vapor or
(2) System Hydrostatic Test, IWA-5211(b) gas space above liquid level for which overpressure
(b)(1) The system pressure tests and visual examina- protection is provided by relief valve.
tions shall be conducted in accordance with IWA-5000 (e) For the purpose of the test, open ended1 portions
and this Article. The contained fluid in the system of suction or drain lines from a storage tank extending
shall serve as the pressurizing medium. to the first shutoff valve shall be considered as an
(2) Alternatively, steam systems may use either extension of the storage tank.
water or gas as the pressurizing medium. When gas (f) For open ended portions of discharge lines beyond
is the pressurizing medium, the test procedure shall the last shutoff valve in nonclosed systems (e.g., service
include methods for detection and location of through- water systems), confirmation of adequate flow during
wall leakage from components of the system tested. system operation shall be acceptable in lieu of system
hydrostatic test.
(g) Open ended vent and drain lines from components
IWD-5220 PRESSURE
extending beyond the last shutoff valve and open ended
A00 IWD-5221 System Leakage Test safety or relief valve discharge lines, including safety
or relief valve piping which discharges into the contain-
The system leakage test shall be conducted at the
ment pressure suppression pool, shall be exempt from
system pressure obtained while the system, or portion
hydrostatic test.
of the system, is in service performing its normal
(h) The pressure measuring instrument used for mea-
operating function or at the system pressure developed
suring system hydrostatic or pneumatic test pressure
during a test conducted to verify system operability
(e.g., to demonstrate system safety function or satisfy shall meet the requirements of IWA-5260.
technical specification surveillance requirements).
98 IWD-5222 System Hydrostatic Test

IWD-5230 TEMPERATURE
(a) The system hydrostatic test pressure shall be at
least 1.10 times the system pressure Psv for systems (a) The system test temperature during a system
with Design Temperature of 200°F or less, and at least hydrostatic test in systems constructed of ferritic steel
1.25 times the system pressure Psv for systems with components shall satisfy either the requirements of
Design Temperature above 200°F (93°C). The system fracture prevention criteria, as applicable, or the test
pressure Psv shall be the lowest pressure setting among temperature determined by the Owner.
the number of safety or relief valves provided for
overpressure protection within the boundary of the
1 Discharge lines to structural compartments (e.g., service water pump
system to be tested. For systems (or portions of systems)
intake structures) and collection tanks, sumps, and basins that are
not provided with safety or relief valves, the system open (or may become open) to the atmosphere are considered
design pressure Pd shall be substituted for Psv. open ended.
212

[This is electronic SEC11$$105 page #212
SUBSECTION IWE A99
A00
REQUIREMENTS FOR CLASS MC
AND METALLIC LINERS OF CLASS CC
COMPONENTS OF LIGHT-WATER
COOLED PLANTS
IWE-1000 Scope and Responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

IWE-1100 Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
IWE-1200 Components Subject to Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
IWE-1210 Examination Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
IWE-1220 Components Exempted From Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
IWE-1230 Accessibility for Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
IWE-1231 Accessible Surface Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
IWE-1232 Inaccessible Surface Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
IWE-1240 Surface Areas Requiring Augmented Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
IWE-1241 Examination Surface Areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
IWE-1242 Identification of Examination Surface Areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
IWE-2000 Examination and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

IWE-2100 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
IWE-2200 Preservice Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
IWE-2300 Visual Examination, Personnel Qualification, and Responsible Individual . . . . . . . . . . 219
IWE-2310 Visual Examinations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
IWE-2320 Responsible Individual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
IWE-2330 Personnel Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
IWE-2400 Inspection Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
IWE-2410 Inspection Program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
IWE-2411 Inspection Program A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
IWE-2412 Inspection Program B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
IWE-2420 Successive Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
IWE-2500 Examination and Pressure Test Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
IWE-2600 Condition of Surface to Be Examined. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
IWE-3000 Acceptance Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

IWE-3100 Evaluation of Examination Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
IWE-3110 Preservice Examinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
IWE-3111 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
IWE-3112 Acceptance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
IWE-3114 Repair /Replacement Activity and Reexamination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
215

[This is electronic file SEC11$$110 page #215 pd: bctoc
IWE-3120 Inservice Examinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
IWE-3121 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
IWE-3122 Acceptance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
IWE-3122.1 Acceptance by Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
IWE-3122.2 Acceptance by Repair /Replacement Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
IWE-3122.3 Acceptance by Engineering Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
IWE-3124 Repair/Replacement Activity and Reexamination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
IWE-3130 Inservice Visual Examinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
IWE-3200 Supplemental Examinations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
IWE-3400 Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
IWE-3410 Acceptance Standards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
IWE-3430 Acceptability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
IWE-3500 Acceptance Standards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
IWE-3510 Standards for Examination Category E-A, Containment Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
IWE-3510.1 Visual Examination — General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
IWE-3510.2 Visual Examination of Coated and Noncoated Areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
IWE-3510.3 Visual Examination of Pressure-Retaining Bolting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
IWE-3510.4 Visual Examination of Moisture Barriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
IWE-3511 Standards for Examination Category E-C, Containment Surfaces Requiring
Augmented Examinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
IWE-3511.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
IWE-3511.2 Visual Examination of Coated and Noncoated Areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
IWE-3511.3 Ultrasonic Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
IWE-5000 System Pressure Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

IWE-5200 System Test Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
IWE-5210 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
IWE-5220 Tests Following Repair, Modification, or Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
IWE-5221 Leakage Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
IWE-5222 Deferral of Leakage Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
IWE-5240 Visual Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
IWE-5250 Corrective Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Figure
IWE-2500-1 Examination Areas for Moisture Barriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Tables
IWE-2411-1 Inspection Program A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
IWE-2412-1 Inspection Program B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
IWE-2500-1 Examination Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
IWE-2500-2 Ultrasonic Thickness Measurements for Augmented Examinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
216

[This is electronic SEC11$$110 page #216 pd: bctoc
ARTICLE IWE-1000
SCOPE AND RESPONSIBILITY
IWE-1100 SCOPE (d) piping, pumps, and valves that are part of the
containment system, or which penetrate or are attached
This Subsection provides requirements for inservice
to the containment vessel. These components shall be
inspection of Class MC pressure retaining components
examined in accordance with the requirements of IWB
and their integral attachments, and of metallic shell
or IWC, as appropriate to the classification defined by
and penetration liners of Class CC pressure retaining
the Design Specifications.
components and their integral attachments in light-water
cooled plants.
IWE-1230 ACCESSIBILITY FOR

EXAMINATION
IWE-1200 COMPONENTS SUBJECT TO
IWE-1231 Accessible Surface Areas 98
EXAMINATION A00
(a) As a minimum, the following portions of Class
IWE-1210 EXAMINATION REQUIREMENTS
MC containment vessels, parts and appurtenances, and
The examination requirements of this Subsection shall Class CC metallic shell and penetration liners shall
apply to Class MC pressure retaining components and remain accessible for either direct or remote visual
their integral attachments and to metallic shell and examination, from at least one side of the vessel, for
penetration liners of Class CC pressure retaining compo- the life of the plant:
nents and their integral attachments. These examinations (1) openings and penetrations;
shall apply to surface areas, including welds and base (2) structural discontinuities;
metal. (3) 80% of the pressure-retaining boundary (ex-
cluding attachments, structural reinforcement, and areas
made inaccessible during construction; and
(4) surface areas identified in IWE-1240.
98 IWE-1220 COMPONENTS EXEMPTED FROM (b) The requirements of IWE-1232 shall be met when
A00 EXAMINATION accessibility for visual examination is only from the
interior surface.
The following components (or parts of components)
are exempted from the examination requirements of
IWE-2000:
IWE-1232 Inaccessible Surface Areas 98
(a) vessels, parts, and appurtenances outside the A00
boundaries of the containment system as defined in the (a) Portions of Class MC containment vessels, parts,
Design Specifications; and appurtenances that are embedded in concrete or
(b) embedded or inaccessible portions of containment otherwise made inaccessible during construction of the
vessels, parts, and appurtenances that met the require- vessel or as a result of vessel repair /replacement activi-
ments of the original Construction Code; ties are exempted from examination, provided:
(c) portions of containment vessels, parts, and appur- (1) no openings or penetrations are embedded in
tenances that become embedded or inaccessible as a the concrete;
result of vessel repair /replacement activities if the (2) all welded joints that are inaccessible for exam-
conditions of IWE-1232(a) and (b) and IWE-5220 ination are double butt welded and are fully radio-
are met; graphed and, prior to being covered, are tested for leak
217

IWE-1232 1998 SECTION XI, DIVISION 1 IWE-1242
tightness using a gas medium test, such as Halide Leak identified in Table IWE-2500-1, Examination Category
Detector Test; and E-C. Such areas include the following:
(3) the vessel is leak rate tested after completion (a) interior and exterior containment surface areas
of construction or repair /replacement activities to the that are subject to accelerated corrosion with no or
leak rate requirements of the Design Specifications. minimal corrosion allowance or areas where the absence
(b) Portions of Class CC metallic shell and penetra- or repeated loss of protective coatings has resulted in
tion liners that are embedded in concrete or otherwise substantial corrosion and pitting. Typical locations of
made inaccessible during construction or as a result of such areas are those exposed to standing water, repeated
repair /replacement activities are exempted from exami- wetting and drying, persistent leakage, and those with
nation, provided: geometries that permit water accumulation, condensa-
(1) all welded joints that are inaccessible for exam- tion, and microbiological attack. Such areas may include
ination are examined in accordance with CC-5520 and, penetration sleeves, stiffeners, surfaces wetted during
prior to being covered or otherwise obstructed by refueling, concrete-to-steel shell or liner interfaces, em-
adjacent structures, components, parts, or appurtenances, bedment zones, leak chase channels, drain areas, or
are tested for leak tightness in accordance with CC- sump liners.
5536; and (b) interior and exterior containment surface areas
(2) the containment is leak rate tested after comple- that are subject to excessive wear from abrasion or
tion of construction or repair /replacement activities to erosion that causes a loss of protective coatings, defor-
the leak rate requirements of the Design Specifications. mation, or material loss. Typical locations of such areas
(c) Surface areas of Class MC containment vessels, are those subject to substantial traffic, sliding pads or
parts and appurtenances, and surface areas of Class CC supports, pins or clevises, shear lugs, seismic restraints,
metallic shell and penetration liners may be considered surfaces exposed to water jets from testing operations
inaccessible if visual access by line of sight with or safety relief valve discharges, and areas that experi-
adequate lighting from permanent vantage points is ence wear from frequent vibrations.
obstructed by permanent plant structures, equipment, (c) interior and exterior containment surface areas
or components, provided these surface areas do not identified in accordance with IWE-2420(b).
require examination in accordance with the inspection
plan or IWE-1240.
98
IWE-1242 Identification of Examination Surface
Areas
IWE-1240 SURFACE AREAS REQUIRING
AUGMENTED EXAMINATION Surface areas requiring augmented examination shall
be determined in accordance with IWE-1241, and shall
98 IWE-1241 Examination Surface Areas
be identified in the Owner’s Inspection Program.
Surface areas likely to experience accelerated degra- Examination methods shall be in accordance with
dation and aging require the augmented examinations IWE-2500(b).
218

ARTICLE IWE-2000
EXAMINATION AND INSPECTION
98 IWE-2100 GENERAL (e) Preservice examination for a repair /replacement

A99 activity may be conducted prior to installation provided:
The requirements of IWA-2000 apply, except the
(1) the examination is performed after the pressure
requirements of IWA-2210, IWA-2300, IWA-2500, and
test required by the Construction Code has been com-
IWA-2600 are not mandatory for Table IWE-2500-1
pleted;
visual examinations.
(2) the examination is conducted under conditions
and with equipment and techniques equivalent to those
that are expected to be employed for subsequent inser-
98 IWE-2200 PRESERVICE EXAMINATION vice examinations; and
(a) Examinations listed in Table IWE-2500-1 shall be (3) the shop or field examination records are, or
completed prior to initial plant startup. These preservice can be, documented and identified in a form consistent
examinations shall include the pressure retaining por- with that required by IWA-6000.
tions of components not exempted by IWE-1220.
(b) When visual examinations are required, these
examinations shall be performed in accordance with
IWE-2600, following the completion of the pressure
test required by the Construction Code and after applica- IWE-2300 VISUAL EXAMINATION, 98
tion of protective coatings (e.g., paint) when such PERSONNEL QUALIFICATION,
coatings are required. AND RESPONSIBLE
(c) When a vessel, liner, or a portion thereof is INDIVIDUAL
subjected to a repair /replacement activity during the
IWE-2310 VISUAL EXAMINATIONS A00
service lifetime of a plant, the preservice examination
requirements for the portion of the vessel affected by (a) The Owner shall define requirements for visual
the repair /replacement activity shall be met. examination of containment surfaces. Visual examina-
(1) When the repair /replacement activity is per- tions shall be performed, either directly or remotely,
formed while the plant is not in service, the preservice by line of sight from available viewing angles from
examination shall be performed prior to resumption of floors, platforms, walkways, ladders, or other permanent
service. vantage points, unless temporary access is required by
(2) When the repair /replacement activity is per- the inspection plan. The visual examinations shall be
formed while the plant is in service, the preservice performed with adequate illumination, sufficient to de-
examination may be deferred to the next scheduled tect evidence of degradation.
plant outage, provided nondestructive examination in (b) General visual examinations shall be performed
accordance with the Repair /Replacement Program is in accordance with IWE-2500 and Table IWE-2500-1,
performed. Examination Category E-A, to assess the general condi-
(3) When a system leakage test is required by tion of containment surfaces.
IWE-5220, the preservice examination may be per- (c) Detailed visual examinations shall be performed
formed either prior to or following the test. in accordance with IWE-2500 and Table IWE-2500-1,
(d) Welds made as part of repair /replacement activi- Examination Category E-C:
ties shall be examined in accordance with the require- (1) to assess the initial condition of surfaces requir-
ments of IWA-4000, except that for welds joining ing augmented examinations in accordance with IWE-
Class MC or Class CC components to items designed, 1241 and to determine the magnitude and extent of
constructed, and installed to the requirements of Section any deterioration and distress of these surfaces.
III, Class 1, 2, or 3, the examination requirements of (2) to determine the magnitude and extent of deteri-
IWB-2000, IWC-2000, or IWD-2000, as applicable, oration and distress of suspect containment surfaces
shall also apply. initially detected by general visual examinations.
219

IWE-2310 1998 SECTION XI, DIVISION 1 IWE-2412
(d) Detailed visual examinations shall also be per- TABLE IWE-2411-1

formed in accordance with IWE-5240 to assess the INSPECTION PROGRAM A
structural condition of areas affected by repair/replace-
Inspection Period, Minimum Maximum
ment activities.
Inspection Calendar Years of Examinations Examinations
(e) For areas and items subject to detailed visual Interval Plant Service Completed, % Credited, %
examination, the following criteria apply.
1st 3 100 100
(1) Painted or coated areas shall be examined for
evidence of flaking, blistering, peeling, discoloration, 2nd 7 33 67
and other signs of distress. 10 100 100
(2) Noncoated areas shall be examined for evidence
of cracking, discoloration, wear, pitting, excessive corro- 3rd 13 16 34
17 40 50
sion, gouges, surface discontinuities, dents, and other
20 66 75
signs of surface irregularities. 23 100 100
4th 27 8 16
30 25 34
IWE-2320 RESPONSIBLE INDIVIDUAL 33 50 67
(a) The Responsible Individual shall be knowledge- 37 75 100
40 100 ...
able in the requirements for design, inservice inspection,
and testing of Class MC and metallic liners of Class
CC components.
(b) The Responsible Individual shall be responsible
for the following:
(1) development of plans and procedures for exam-
ination of containment surfaces;
IWE-2411 Inspection Program A
(2) instruction, training, and approval of visual
examination personnel; With the exception of the examinations that may be
(3) performance or direction of general and de- deferred until the end of an inspection interval, as
tailed visual examinations; specified in Table IWE-2500-1, the required examina-
(4) evaluation of examination results; and tions shall be completed during each successive inspec-
(5) submittal of report to the Owner documenting tion interval, in accordance with Table IWE-2411-1.
results of examinations. Following completion of Program A after 40 years,
successive inspection intervals shall follow the 10 year
inspection interval of Program B.
A00 IWE-2330 PERSONNEL QUALIFICATION
(a) The Owner shall define the qualification require-
ments for personnel performing visual examinations.
(b) Visual examinations shall be performed by per- IWE-2412 Inspection Program B
sonnel with near-distance acuity of 20/25 or greater (a) With the exception of the examinations that may
Snellen fraction and far-distance acuity of 20/30 or be deferred until the end of an inspection interval, as
greater Snellen fraction or equivalent. Acuity shall be specified in Table IWE-2500-1, the required examina-
demonstrated natural or corrected with at least one eye. tions shall be completed during each successive inspec-
tion interval, in accordance with Table IWE-2412-1.
(b) If items or welds are added to the Inspection
IWE-2400 INSPECTION SCHEDULE Program, examination shall be scheduled as follows.
(1) When items or welds are added during the
IWE-2410 INSPECTION PROGRAM
first period of an interval, at least 25% of the examina-
Inservice examinations and system pressure tests may tions required by the applicable Examination Category
be performed during plant outages such as refueling and Item Number for the added items or welds shall
shutdowns or maintenance shutdowns. The requirements be performed during each of the second and third
of either Inspection Program A or Inspection Program periods of that interval. Alternatively, if deferral of the
B shall be met. examinations is permitted for the Examination Category
220

ARTICLE IWE-4000 98
A00
REPAIR PROCEDURES
DELETED
229

ARTICLE IWE-5000
IWE-5200 SYSTEM TEST REQUIREMENTS performed in accordance with the Repair /Replacement
Program and Plan:
IWE-5210 GENERAL (a) welds of attachments to the surface of the pressure
Except as noted in IWE-5240, the requirements of retaining boundary;
IWA-5000 are not applicable to Class MC or Class (b) weld cavities, the depth of which does not pene-
CC components. trate the required design wall by more than 10%;
and
(c) welds attaching penetrations that are NPS 1
(DN25) or smaller.
IWE-5220 TESTS FOLLOWING REPAIR /
REPLACEMENT ACTIVITIES IWE-5240 VISUAL EXAMINATION 98
98 IWE-5221 Leakage Test During the pressure test required by IWE-5220, a
Except as noted in IWE-5222, repair /replacement detailed visual examination (IWE-2310) shall be per-
activities performed on the pressure retaining boundary formed on areas affected by repair/replacement activ-
of Class MC or Class CC components shall be subjected ities.
to a pneumatic leakage test in accordance with the
provisions of Title 10, Part 50 of the Code of Federal
Regulations, Appendix J, Paragraph IV.A. IWE-5250 CORRECTIVE ACTION 98
If the leakage test requirements of IWE-5221 cannot

be satisfied, the source of leakage shall be located and
IWE-5222 Deferral of Leakage Tests the area shall be examined to the extent necessary to
establish the requirements for corrective action. Repair /
Leakage tests for the following minor repair /replace- replacement activities shall be performed in accordance
ment activities performed on the pressure retaining with the requirements of IWA-4000. Leakage testing
boundary may be deferred until the next scheduled shall be reperformed as required by IWE-5220, prior
leakage test, provided nondestructive examination is to returning the component to service.
230

ARTICLE IWE-7000 98
A00
REPLACEMENTS
DELETED
231

IWF-2410 REQUIREMENTS FOR COMPONENT SUPPORTS IWF-2500
98 TABLE IWF-2410-2 component supports immediately adjacent to those com-

INSPECTION PROGRAM B ponent supports for which corrective action is required.
The additional examinations shall be extended to include
Inspection
additional supports within the system, equal in number
Period, Calendar
Years of Plant Minimum Maximum and of the same type and function as those scheduled
Inspection Service, Within Examinations Examinations for examination during the inspection period.
Interval the Interval Completed, % Credited, % (b) When the additional examinations required by
All 3 16 50 IWF-2430(a) reveal flaws or relevant conditions ex-
7 501 75 ceeding the acceptance standards of IWF-3400, the
10 100 100 examinations shall be further extended to include addi-
Note:
tional examinations during the current outage. These
(1) If the first period completion percentage for any examination additional examinations shall include the remaining
category exceeds 34%, at least 16% of the required examinations component supports within the system of the same type
shall be performed in the second period.
and function.
(c) When the additional examinations required by
IWF-2430(b) reveal flaws or relevant conditions ex-
ceeding the acceptance standards of IWF-3400, the
examinations required by the applicable Examination examinations shall be extended to include all nonexempt
Category and Item Number for the added component supports potentially subject to the same failure modes
supports shall be performed during the third period of that required corrective measures in accordance with
that interval. IWF-2430(a) and (b).
(3) When component supports are added during Also, these additional examinations shall include
the third period of an interval, examinations shall be nonexempt component supports in other systems when
scheduled in accordance with IWF-2410(b) for succes- the support failures requiring corrective measures indi-
sive intervals. cate non-system-related support failure modes.
(d) Following completion of Program A after 40 (d) When the additional examinations required by
years, successive inspection intervals shall follow the IWF-2430(c) reveal flaws or relevant conditions ex-
10 year inspection interval of Program B. ceeding the acceptance standards of IWF-3400, the
Owner shall examine those exempt component supports
that could be affected by the same observed failure
IWF-2420 SUCCESSIVE INSPECTIONS modes and could affect nonexempt components.
(a) The sequence of component support examinations
established during the first inspection interval shall be
IWF-2500 EXAMINATION A00
repeated during each successive inspection interval, to
the extent practical.
REQUIREMENTS
(b) When a component support is accepted for contin- The following shall be examined in accordance with
ued service in accordance with IWF-3112.2 or IWF- Table IWF-2500-1:
3122.2, the component support shall be reexamined (a) mechanical connections1 to pressure retaining
during the next inspection period listed in the schedules components and building structure
of the inspection programs of IWF-2410. (b) weld connections to building structure
(c) When the examinations required by IWF-2420(b) (c) weld and mechanical connections at intermediate
do not require additional corrective measures during joints in multiconnected integral and nonintegral sup-
the next inspection period, the inspection schedule may ports
revert to the requirements of IWF-2420(a). (d) clearances of guides and stops, alignment of
supports, and assembly of support items
(e) hot or cold settings of spring supports and con-
IWF-2430 ADDITIONAL EXAMINATIONS stant load supports
(f) accessible sliding surfaces
(a) Component support examinations performed in
accordance with Table IWF-2500-1 that reveal flaws 1 For pipe-clamp-type supports, the mechanical connection to the
or relevant conditions exceeding the acceptance stan- pressure boundary includes the bolting pins, and their interface to
dards of IWF-3400 shall be extended to include the the clamp, but does not include the component-to-clamp interface.
239

IWF-2510 1998 SECTION XI, DIVISION 1 IWF-2520
IWF-2510 SUPPORTS SELECTED FOR

EXAMINATION
Supports not exempted by IWF-1230 shall be exam-
ined in accordance with Table IWF-2500-1.
IWF-2520 METHOD OF EXAMINATION

The methods of examination shall comply with those
in Table IWF-2500-1. Alternative methods of examina-
tion meeting the requirements of IWA-2240 may be
used.
240

IWL-2310 REQUIREMENTS FOR CLASS CC COMPONENTS IWL-2421
(4) the condition of concrete surfaces affected completed within this stated time interval, examination
by repair/replacement activities, in accordance with of those portions may be deferred until the next regularly
IWL-5250. scheduled plant outage.
(c) Visual examinations shall be performed directly (c) The 10 year and subsequent examinations shall
or remotely, with adequate illumination, by personnel commence not more than 1 year prior to the specified
with visual acuity sufficient to detect evidence of degra- dates and shall be completed not more than 1 year
dation. after such dates. If plant operating conditions are such
(d) The Owner shall define qualification requirements that examination of portions of the concrete cannot be
for personnel performing examinations of concrete and completed within this stated time interval, examination
tendon anchorage hardware, wires, or strands. of those portions may be deferred until the next regularly
(e) The Owner shall define requirements for visual scheduled plant outage.
examination of tendon anchorage hardware, wires, or
strands.
IWL-2420 UNBONDED POST-TENSIONING
SYSTEMS
IWL-2320 RESPONSIBLE ENGINEER
(a) Unbonded post-tensioning systems shall be exam-
The Responsible Engineer shall be a Registered ined in accordance with IWL-2520 at 1, 3, and 5 years
Professional Engineer experienced in evaluating the following the completion of the containment Structural
condition of structural concrete. The Responsible Engi- Integrity Test and every 5 years thereafter.
neer shall have knowledge of the design and Construc- (b) The 1, 3, and 5 year examinations shall commence
tion Codes and other criteria used in design and con- not more than 6 months prior to the specified dates
struction of concrete containments in nuclear power and shall be completed not more than 6 months after
plants. such dates. If plant operating conditions are such that
The Responsible Engineer shall be responsible for examination of portions of the post-tensioning system
the following: cannot be completed within this stated time interval,
(a) development of plans and procedures for examina- examination of those portions may be deferred until
tion of concrete surfaces; the next regularly scheduled plant outage.
(b) approval, instruction, and training of concrete (c) The 10 year and subsequent examinations shall
examination personnel; commence not more than 1 year prior to the specified
(c) evaluation of examination results; dates and shall be completed not more than 1 year
(d) preparation or review of Repair /Replacement after such dates.
Plans and procedures;
(e) review of procedures for pressure tests following IWL-2421 Sites With Multiple Plants
repair/replacement activities;
(f) submittal of a report to the Owner documenting re- (a) For sites with multiple plants, the examination
sults of examinations, repair /replacement activities, and requirements for the concrete containments may be
pressure tests. modified if the containments utilize the same pre-
stressing system and are essentially identical in design,
if post-tensioning operations for each subsequent con-
IWL-2400 INSERVICE INSPECTION tainment constructed at the site were completed not
SCHEDULE more than 2 years apart, and if the containments are
similarly exposed to or protected from the outside
IWL-2410 CONCRETE
environment.
(a) Concrete shall be examined in accordance with (b) When the conditions of IWL-2421(a) are met,
IWL-2510 at 1, 3, and 5 years following the completion the inspection dates and examination requirements may
of the containment Structural Integrity Test CC-6000 be as follows.
and every 5 years thereafter. (1) For the containment with the first Structural
(b) The 1, 3, and 5 year examinations shall commence Integrity Test, all examinations required by IWL-2500
not more than 6 months prior to the specified dates shall be performed at 1, 3, and 10 years and every
and shall be completed not more than 6 months after 10 years thereafter. Only the examinations required by
such dates. If plant operating conditions are such that IWL-2524 and IWL-2525 need be performed at 5 and
examination of portions of the concrete cannot be 15 years and every 10 years thereafter.
251

IWL-2421 1998 SECTION XI, DIVISION 1 IWL-2522
(2) For each subsequent containment constructed not examined during earlier inspections. The number
at the site, all examinations required by IWL-2500 of tendons to be examined during an inspection shall
shall be performed at 1, 5, and 15 years and every be as specified in Table IWL-2521-1.
10 years thereafter. Only the examinations required by (b) One tendon of each type (as defined in Table
IWL-2524 and IWL-2525 need be performed at 3 and IWL-2521-1) shall be selected from the first year inspec-
10 years and every 10 years thereafter. tion sample and designated as a common tendon. Each
common tendon shall be examined during each inspec-
tion. A common tendon shall not be detensioned unless
IWL-2500 EXAMINATION required by IWL-3300. If a common tendon is deten-
sioned, another common tendon of the same type shall
REQUIREMENTS
be selected from the first year inspection sample.
Examination shall be performed in accordance with (c) If a containment with a stranded post-tensioning
the requirements of Table IWL-2500-1. system is constructed with a predesignated number of
detensionable tendons, one tendon of each type shall
be selected from among those that are detensionable.
IWL-2510 SURFACE EXAMINATION The remaining tendons shall be selected from among
those that cannot be detensioned.
(a) Concrete surface areas, including coated areas,
except those exempted by IWL-1220(b), shall be visu- IWL-2521.1 Exemptions. The following require-
ally examined in accordance with IWL-2310(a) for ments shall apply to tendon anchorages that are not
evidence of conditions indicative of damage or degra- accessible for examination because of safety or radiolog-
dation, such as defined in ACI 201.1. Selected areas, ical hazards or because of structural obstructions.
such as those that indicate suspect conditions, shall be (a) After the process of randomly selecting tendons
visually examined in accordance with IWL-2310(b). to be examined, any inaccessible tendons shall be
(b) Tendon anchorage areas, including coated areas, designated as exempt and removed from the sample.
except those exempted by IWL-1220(a), shall be visually (b) Substitute tendons shall be selected for all tendons
examined in accordance with IWL-2310(b) for evidence designated as exempt. Each substitute tendon shall be
of conditions indicating damage or degradation. Selected selected so that it is located as close as possible to
areas, such as those that indicate suspect conditions, the exempted tendon, and shall be examined in accord-
shall be subject to additional examinations, if specified ance with IWL-2520.
by the Responsible Engineer. (c) Each exempted tendon shall be examined in
(c) For containments with unbonded post-tensioning accordance with IWL-2524 and IWL-2525 to the extent
systems, the concrete surfaces and tendon end anchorage that the end anchorages of the exempt tendon are
areas shall be examined for corrosion protection medium accessible either during operation or at an outage.
leakage, and the tendon end caps shall be examined
for deformation.
(d) The examination shall be performed by, or under IWL-2522 Tendon Force and Elongation
the direction of, the Responsible Engineer. Measurements
(e) Visual examinations may be performed from (a) The prestressing force in all inspection sample
floors, roofs, platforms, walkways, ladders, ground sur- tendons shall be measured by lift-off or an equiva-
face, or other permanent vantage points, unless tempo- lent test.
rary close-in access is required by the inspection plan. (b) Equipment used to measure tendon force shall
be calibrated in accordance with a calibration procedure
prior to the first tendon force measurement and following
IWL-2520 EXAMINATION OF UNBONDED the final tendon force measurement of the inspection
POST-TENSIONING SYSTEMS period. Accuracy of the calibration shall be within
1.5% of the specified minimum ultimate strength of
A00 IWL-2521 Tendon Selection
the tendon. If the post-test calibration differs from the
(a) Tendons to be examined during an inspection pretest calibration by more than the specified accuracy
shall be selected on a random basis except as noted tolerance, the results of the examination shall be eval-
in IWL-2521(b) and (c). The population from which uated.
the random sample is drawn shall consist of all tendons (c) During retensioning of a tendon, the tendon elon-
of a particular type (as defined in Table IWL-2521-1) gation shall be measured.
252

ASME B&PVC
A00 TABLE IWL-2500-1
EXAMINATION CATEGORY L-A, CONCRETE
Item Test or Examination Test or Examination Acceptance Extent Frequency Deferral

No. Parts Examined Requirement Method Standard of Examination of Examination of Examination
L1.10 Concrete Surface
L1.11 All Accessible Surface Areas IWL-2510 General Visual IWL-3210 IWL-2510 IWL-2410 NA
L1.12 Suspect Areas IWL-2510 Detailed Visual IWL-3210 IWL-2510 IWL-2410 NA
253
EXAMINATION CATEGORY L-B, UNBONDED POST-TENSIONING SYSTEM
Item Test or Examination Test or Examination Acceptance Extent Frequency Deferral
SEC11$U160 05-16-00 16:18:54

No. Parts Examined Requirement Method Standard of Examination of Examination of Examination
L2.10 Tendon IWL-2522 IWL-2522 IWL-3221.1 IWL-2521 IWL-2420 NA
L2.20 Wire or Strand IWL-2523 IWL-2523.2 IWL-3221.2 IWL-2523.1 IWL-2420 NA
L2.30 Anchorage Hardware and Surrounding Concrete IWL-2524 Detailed Visual IWL-3221.3 IWL-2524.1 IWL-2420 NA
REQUIREMENTS FOR CLASS CC COMPONENTS
[This is electronic file SEC11$U160 page #253

L2.40 Corrosion Protection Medium IWL-2525 IWL-2525.2(a) IWL-3221.4 IWL-2525.1(a) IWL-2420 NA
L2.50 Free Water IWL-2525 IWL-2525.2(b) IWL-2525.1(b) IWL-2420 NA
pd: sec11 Rev 15.04

Table IWL-2500-1
IWL-2523 1998 SECTION XI, DIVISION 1 IWL-2526
TABLE IWL-2521-1 IWL-2524 Examination of Tendon Anchorage

NUMBER OF TENDONS FOR EXAMINATION Areas
Required Maximum IWL-2524.1 Visual Examination. A detailed visual
Percentage1,2 Minimum1 Required examination in accordance with IWL-2310(b) shall be
Inspection of all Tendons Number of Number of performed on the tendon anchorage hardware, including
Period of Each Type3 Each Type Each Type
bearing plates, anchorheads, wedges, buttonheads,
1st year 4 4 10 shims, and the concrete extending outward a distance
3rd year 4 4 10 of 2 ft from the edge of the bearing plate. The following
5th year 4 4 10
shall be documented:
10th year4 2 3 5 (a) concrete cracks having widths greater than
0.01 in.;
NOTES:
(1) Fractional tendon numbers shall be rounded to the next higher (b) corrosion, broken or protruding wires, missing
integer. Actual number examined shall not be less than the mini- buttonheads, broken strands, and cracks in tendon an-
mum required number and need not be more than the maximum chorage hardware;
required number.
(2) The reduced sample size listed for the 10th year and subsequent (c) broken wires or strands, protruding wires and
inspections is applicable only if the acceptable criteria of IWL- detached buttonheads following retensioning of tendons
3221.1 have been met for the last three inspections. which have been detensioned.
(3) A tendon type is defined by its geometry and position in the
containment: e.g., hoop, vertical, dome, helical, and inverted U. IWL-2524.2 Free Water Documentation. The quan-
(4) The number and percentage of tendons to be examined every 5th
year thereafter shall remain the same. tity of free water contained in the anchorage end cap
as well as any which drains from the tendon during
the examination process shall be documented.
IWL-2525 Examination of Corrosion Protection

IWL-2523 Tendon Wire and Strand Sample Medium and Free Water
Examination and Testing
IWL-2525.1 Samples
IWL-2523.1 Tendon Detensioning and Sample Re- (a) Samples of the corrosion protection medium shall
moval. One sample tendon of each type shall be be taken from each end of each tendon examined. Free
completely detensioned. A single wire or strand shall water shall not be included in the samples.
be removed from each detensioned tendon. (b) Samples of free water shall be taken where water
IWL-2523.2 Sample Examination and Testing is present in quantities sufficient for laboratory analysis.
(a) Each removed wire or strand shall be examined IWL-2525.2 Sample Analysis
over its entire length for corrosion and mechanical (a) Each corrosion protection medium sample shall
damage. The examination shall determine the location be thoroughly mixed and analyzed for reserve alkalinity,
of most severe corrosion, if any. Strand wires shall be water content, and concentrations of water soluble
examined for wedge slippage marks. chlorides, nitrates, and sulfides. Analyses shall be per-
(b) Tension tests shall be performed on each removed formed in accordance with the procedures specified in
wire or strand: one at each end, one at midlength, and Table IWL-2525-1.
one in the location of the most corroded area, if (b) Free water samples shall be analyzed to deter-
any. The following information shall be obtained from mine pH.
each test:
(1) yield strength
(2) ultimate tensile strength IWL-2526 Removal and Replacement of
(3) elongation Corrosion Protection Medium
IWL-2523.3 Retensioning. Tendons that have been (a) The amount of corrosion protection medium re-
detensioned shall be retensioned to at least the force moved at each anchorage shall be measured and the
predicted for the tendon at the time of the test. However, total amount removed from each tendon (two anchor-
the retensioning force shall not exceed 70% of the ages) shall be recorded. The total amount replaced in
specified minimum ultimate tensile strength of the each tendon shall be recorded and differences between
tendon based on the number of effective wires or amount removed and amount replaced shall be docu-
strands in the tendon at the time of retensioning. mented.
254

IWL-3221.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR CLASS CC COMPONENTS IWL-3310
ment from the previous examination, indicate a prestress IWL-3222 Acceptance by Evaluation
loss such that predicted tendon forces meet the minimum
Items with examination results that do not meet the
design prestress forces at the next scheduled examina-
acceptance standards of IWL-3221 shall be evaluated
tion; and
as required by IWL-3300.
(d) the measured tendon elongation varies from the
last measurement, adjusted for effective wires or strands,
by less than 10%. IWL-3223 Acceptance by Repair /Replacement
Activity
IWL-3221.2 Tendon Wire or Strand Samples. The Repair /replacement activities to reestablish accept-
condition of wire or strand samples is acceptable if: ability of the condition of an item shall be completed
(a) samples are free of physical damage; as required by IWL-3300. Acceptable completion of
(b) sample ultimate tensile strength and elongation the repair /replacement activity shall constitute accept-
are not less than minimum specified values. ability of the item.
IWL-3221.3 Tendon Anchorage Areas. The condi-

tion of tendon anchorage areas is acceptable if: IWL-3300 EVALUATION
(a) there is no evidence of cracking in anchor heads,
shims, or bearing plates; IWL-3310 EVALUATION REPORT
(b) there is no evidence of active corrosion; Items with examination results that do not meet the
(c) broken or unseated wires, broken strands, and acceptance standards of IWL-3100 or IWL-3200 shall
detached buttonheads were documented and accepted be evaluated by the Owner. The Owner shall be respon-
during a preservice examination or during a previous sible for preparation of an Engineering Evaluation
inservice examination; Report stating the following:
(d) cracks in the concrete adjacent to the bearing (a) the cause of the condition that does not meet
plates do not exceed 0.01 in. (0.3 mm) in width; the acceptance standards;
(e) there is no evidence of free water. (b) the applicability of the condition to any other
plants at the same site;
IWL-3221.4 Corrosion Protection Medium. Corro- (c) the acceptability of the concrete containment
sion protection medium is acceptable when the reserve without repair of the item;
alkalinity, water content, and soluble ion concentrations (d) whether or not repair /replacement activity is re-
of all samples are within the limits specified in Table quired and, if required, the extent, method, and comple-
IWL-2525-1. The absolute difference between the tion date for the repair /replacement activity;
amount removed and the amount replaced shall not (e) extent, nature, and frequency of additional exami-
exceed 10% of the tendon net duct volume. nations.
257

ARTICLE IWL-4000
IWL-4100 GENERAL degradation sufficient to warrant further evaluation or

repair. When required, reinforcing steel shall be repaired
A00 IWL-4110 SCOPE
in accordance with IWL-4230. Repair /replacement ac-
(a) This Article provides requirements for repair / tivities on exposed-end anchors of the post-tensioning
replacement activities on concrete containments. system shall be in accordance with IWL-4240.
(b) Grease cups and installation screws are exempt (d) New material shall be chemically, mechanically,
from the requirements of this Article. and physically compatible with existing concrete.
(c) Installation of concrete anchors is exempt from (e) When detensioning of prestressing tendons is
the requirements of this Article, provided the installation required for the repair /replacement activity on the
affects only the cover concrete external to the outermost concrete surface adjacent to the tendon, the Repair /
layer of structural reinforcing steel or post-tensioning Replacement Plan shall require the following:
system. (1) selection of new material to minimize stress
and strain incompatibilities between new material and
existing concrete;
IWL-4120 REPAIR /REPLACEMENT (2) procedures for application of new material;
PROGRAM (3) procedures for detensioning and retensioning
of prestressing tendons.
Repair /replacement activities shall be performed in (f) The Repair /Replacement Plan shall specify re-
accordance with the Repair /Replacement Program and quirements for in-process sampling and testing of new
Plan required by IWA-4150. The Repair /Replacement material.
Program shall address concrete material control.
IWL-4230 REINFORCING STEEL

IWL-4200 REPAIR /REPLACEMENT PLAN Damaged reinforcing steel shall be corrected by any
IWL-4210 RESPONSIBLE ENGINEER method permitted in the original Construction Code or
in Section III, Division 2, with or without removal of
The Repair /Replacement Plan shall be developed the damaged reinforcing steel.
under the direction of a Responsible Engineer (IWL-
2300).
IWL-4240 POST-TENSIONING SYSTEM
(a) Welding of bearing plates and shim plates of
IWL-4220 CONCRETE
the post-tensioning system shall meet the applicable
(a) The Repair /Replacement Plan shall specify re- requirements of IWA-4000. The corrosion protection
quirements for removal of defective material. medium shall be restored following the repair /replace-
(b) The affected area shall be visually examined ment activity.
to assure proper surface preparation of concrete and (b) The following items, as applicable, shall be con-
reinforcing steel prior to placement of concrete. tained in the Repair /Replacement Plan:
(c) When removal of defective material exposes rein- (1) requirements for removal of items;
forcing steel, the reinforcing steel shall receive a detailed (2) surface preparation required prior to installation
visual examination as defined in IWL-2310(b). Reinforc- of items;
ing steel is acceptable when the Responsible Engineer (3) examinations required prior to installation of
determines that there is no evidence of damage or items;
258

SUBSECTION IWP A00
INSERVICE TESTING OF PUMPS

IN NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS
DELETED
261–264

SUBSECTION IWV A00
INSERVICE TESTING OF VALVES

IN NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS
DELETED
265–268

[This is electronic file SEC11$$185 page #265 pd: bctoc
ARTICLE III-1000
INTRODUCTION
III-1100 GENERAL A99

A00
(a) This Appendix describes ultrasonic (UT) exami-
nation methods, equipment, and requirements applicable
to vessels not greater than 2 in. in thickness.
(b) The requirements are limited to full penetration
butt welds and adjacent base metal in vessels having
nominal wall thickness of 0.2 in. to 2 in. inclusive.
(c) The requirements of Supplement 1 apply to exam-
ination of austenitic and dissimilar metal welds.
(d) Alternative examination techniques and calibra-
tion block designs and materials may be used as
provided by IWA-2240 except when the requirements
of III-3430 apply.
299

ARTICLE III-2000
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
III-2100 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS TABLE III-2120-1 A99

MAXIMUM NOMINAL SEARCH UNIT SIZES
III-2110 INSTRUMENT
Vessel Wall Thickness Maximum
A pulse-echo ultrasonic flaw detection instrument
(Nominal), in. Nominal Size,1 in.
shall be used. The instrument shall be equipped with
a stepped gain control calibrated in units of 2 dB or less. Less than 0.5 0.25
0.5 to 2.0 0.5
NOTE:
(1) For dual element search units used in the pulse receiver mode,
III-2120 SEARCH UNIT the dimension applies to each individual element.
(a) Search units may contain either single or dual

transducer elements.
(b) Search units with contoured contact wedges may
be used to aid ultrasonic coupling. Calibration shall dure to be used for the examination. The qualification
be done with the contact wedges used during the
shall include demonstrated proficiency in discriminating
examination. between flaw indications and indications of geometric
(c) The maximum nominal search unit sizes for
or metallurgical origin.
circular, square, or rectangular active elements shall
not exceed those listed in Table III-2120-1. Larger
search unit sizes may be used, provided equivalent
sensitivity and examination coverage (III-2410) are III-2300 WRITTEN PROCEDURE
demonstrated for a semicircular notch (0.5 aspect ratio)
REQUIREMENTS
of the maximum size allowed by IWB-3500. Equiva-
lence is established by comparing the responses from Ultrasonic examination shall be performed in accord-
the semicircular notch of the larger search unit and ance with a written procedure. Each procedure shall
the maximum size search unit allowed by Table III- include, as a minimum, the following information:
2120-1. Equivalence may be obtained by adjusting (a) weld types and configurations to be examined,
examination coverage (III-2410), scanning sensitivity including thickness dimensions, materials, and product
(III-2430), and recording levels in accordance with form (e.g., casting, forging, or plate);
III-4510. (b) scanning surface and surface condition require-
ments;
(c) equipment list, including each of the following
applicable items:
A99 III-2200 PERSONNEL REQUIREMENTS
(1) make and model of pulse-echo ultrasonic flaw
(a) Nondestructive examination personnel shall be detection instrument;
qualified in accordance with IWA-2300. (2) transducer size and search unit type, angle,
(b) Personnel who perform recording or determine and frequency;
which indications are to be recorded in accordance (3) size and configuration of wedges and shoes;
with III-4510 shall have successfully completed the (4) automatic alarm and recording equipment;
qualification requirements of III-2200(a), for the proce- (5) rotating, revolving, or scanning mechanisms;
300

APPENDIX VIII — MANDATORY Fig. VIII-S4-1
FIG. VIII-S4-1 DEFINITION OF STATISTICAL PARAMETERS
371

Supplement 7 1998 SECTION XI, DIVISION 1 Supplement 8
TABLE VIII-S6-1
DETECTION AND SIZING TEST FLAWS AND LOCATIONS
Flaw Through-Wall Dimension, in.
Flaw Location 0.075–0.200 0.201–0.350 0.351–0.550 0.551–0.750 0.751–2.00

Inner 10% [Note (1)] X X S S ...
Outer 10% X X S S ...
11–30% T ... ... X X S
31–60% T ... ... X X S
61–89% T ... ... X X S
NOTE:
(1) Does not apply to clad vessels (see Supplement 4).
LEGEND:
X Applies to detection and sizing flaws.
S Applies only to sizing flaws.
T Thickness of the thickest specimen in the specimen set.
SUPPLEMENT 7 — QUALIFICATION flaws shall be combined with the sizing results from
REQUIREMENTS FOR NOZZLE-TO-VESSEL the reactor vessel weld qualification and the combined
WELD results shall meet the acceptance criteria of Supplement
6, 3.2.
Demonstration on reactor vessel plate specimens
(Supplement 6) qualifies examination procedures, equip-
ment, and personnel for nozzle-to-vessel weld examina-
tion when the following requirements are met. SUPPLEMENT 8 — QUALIFICATION
(a) For detection, a minimum of three additional REQUIREMENTS FOR BOLTS AND STUDS
flaws in one or more full-scale nozzle mock-ups shall
1.0 SPECIMEN REQUIREMENTS
be added to the test set. The specimens shall comply
with Supplement 6, 1.1, but flaws may be either notches Qualification test specimens shall meet the require-
or cracks. Flaw locations and orientations shall be ments listed herein, unless a set of specimens is designed
selected from the choices shown in Table VIII-S7-1. to accommodate specific limitations stated in the scope
At least one subsurface flaw shall be included and of the examination procedure.
there shall be no more than one flaw from each category. 1.1 Specimens shall conform to the following require- A00
(1) For demonstrations performed from the vessel ments.
shell, the specimen shall be at least 90% of the maximum (a) The qualification process shall be performed with
thickness to be examined. a full-scale section bolt or stud that is sufficient to
(2) For examinations performed from the bore of contain the beam path and demonstrate the scanning
the nozzle, at least one flaw parallel to the weld technique.
shall provide a metal path distance within 10% of the (b) The qualification specimen shall be of similar
equivalent path length to the weld centerline of the chemical composition, tensile properties, and metallurgi-
thickest component to be examined. cal structure as the bolt or stud to be examined. The
(3) Each of the flaws presented for demonstration scan surface of the qualification specimen shall have
shall be correctly identified, in accordance with Supple- a configuration similar to the bolt or stud to be examined.
ment 6, 2.1, with no false calls. (c) Circumferentially oriented notches shall be lo-
(b) For length sizing, a minimum of three additional cated in the qualification specimen at the minimum
flaws as in (a) above shall be added to the test set. and maximum qualified metal paths. Notches located
All flaws shall be sized to the acceptance standards of within one diameter of the end of the bolt or stud
Supplement 6. opposite the search unit are suitable for demonstrating
(c) For depth sizing, a minimum of three additional the maximum metal path distance. These notches are
flaws as in (a) above shall be added to the test set. required on the outside threaded surface, with maximum
Their depths shall be evenly distributed over the ranges depths and reflective areas as specified in Table VIII-
of Supplement 6, 1.1. The sizing results from these S8-1.
372

ARTICLE A-3000
METHOD FOR KI DETERMINATION
A-3100 SCOPE Coefficients A0 through A3 shall provide an accurate

representation of stress over the flaw plane for all
This Article provides a method for calculating stress
values of flaw depths, 0 ≤ x /a ≤ 1, covered by the
intensity factors, KI, using the representative stresses
analysis. Stresses from all sources identified in A-
at the flaw location determined by stress analysis. The
3200(a) shall be considered. Alternatively, the actual
solutions for KI are based on flat plate geometry and
stress distribution may be approximated by a linear
can be used for subsurface flaws and internal and
distribution that accurately represents or bounds the
external surface flaws in cylinders for all values of
stress field over the flaw depth. An example of lineariza-
R /t (the ratio of mean radius to thickness).
tion of a concave upward stress field is illustrated in
Fig. A-3200-1(b).
A-3200 STRESSES
A-3300 STRESS INTENSITY FACTOR
(a) For a surface or a subsurface flaw, the stresses EQUATIONS
at the flaw location shall be resolved into membrane
and bending stresses. Residual stresses and applied The detected flaw shall be represented by an ellipse
stresses from all forms of loading, including pressure or a semiellipse as illustrated in Fig. A-3300-1. The
stresses and cladding-induced stresses, shall be consid- stress intensity factors for the flaw model shall be
ered. For nonlinear stress variations through the wall, determined using the stresses and flaw geometry de-
the actual stress distribution may be approximated by scribed in A-3310 for subsurface flaws or A-3320 for
a linear distribution that accurately represents or bounds surface flaws.
the stress field over the flaw depth. An example of
linearization of a concave upward stress field is illus-
trated in Fig. A-3200-1. The linearized stress distribution A-3310 SUBSURFACE FLAW EQUATIONS A00
may then be characterized by the membrane stress, ␴m, Stress intensity factors for subsurface flaws shall be
and the bending stress, ␴b, as shown in Fig. A-3200-1. calculated using the membrane and bending stresses at
(b) For a surface flaw, the stresses normal to the the flaw location by the following equation.1
plane of the flaw at the flaw location may be represented
by a polynomial fit over the flaw depth by the following KI p [␴m Mm + ␴b Mb]√ ␲ a /Q (2)
relationship:
where
2 3
冢冣冢冣冢冣 ␴m, ␴bpmembrane and bending stresses, in accord-

x x x
␴ p A0 + A 1 + A2 +A3 (1)
a a a ance with A-3200(a)
apone-half the axis of elliptical flaw
Mmpcorrection factor for membrane stress from
where
Fig. A-3310-1
xpdistance through the wall measured from
the flawed surface
1 Use of Eq. (2) is only a recommendation for determination of KI.
apcrack depth
For some complex geometries and stress distributions, this approach
A0, A1, A2, may not be adequate. Other techniques may be used, provided the
A3pconstants methods and analyses are documented.
405

A-3310 1998 SECTION XI, DIVISION 1 A-3320
Mbpcorrection factor for bending stress from A0, A1, A2,

Fig. A-3310-2 A3pcoefficients from Eq. (1) that represent the
The flaw shape parameter Q is calculated using the stress distribution over the flaw depth, 0 ≤
following equation: x /a ≤ 1. When calculating KI as a function
of flaw depth, a new set of coefficients A0
Q p 1 + 4.593 (a /ᐉ)1.65 − qy (3) through A3 shall be determined for each
new value of flaw depth.
Appthe internal vessel pressure, p, for internal
where
surface flaws. App 0 for other flaws.
ᐉpthe major axis of the flaw
G0, G1,
a /ᐉpthe flaw aspect ration 0 ≤ a /ᐉ ≤ 0.5
G2, G3pfree surface correction factors from Tables
qypthe plastic zone correction factor calculated
A-3320-1 and A-3320-2
using the following equation:
Qpflaw shape parameter using Eq. (3)
In the calculation of Q using Eq. (3), qy is calculated
qy p [(␴m Mm + ␴b Mb) / ␴ys]2 / 6 (4)
using Eq. (6):
where ␴ys is the material yield strength. qy p [(A0 G0 + Ap G0 + A1 G1 + A2 G2 (6)

+ A3 G3) / ␴ys]2 / 6
A-3320 SURFACE FLAW EQUATIONS (b) When the linearization method is used to convert
the actual stress field into ␴m and ␴b stresses as
The stress intensity factor for a surface flaw2
may
illustrated in Fig. A-3200-1(b), Eq. (7) shall be used
be determined from A-3320(a) or (b).
to calculate KI:
(a) Stress intensity factors for surface flaws should
be calculated using the cubic polynomial stress relation
KI p [(␴m + Ap )Mm + ␴bMb] √␲a/Q (7)
by the following equation.
KI p [(A0 + Ap) G0 + A1 G1 + A2G2 (5) where

+A3 G3] √ ␲ a /Q Appthe internal vessel pressure, p, for internal
surface flaws. App 0 for other flaws.
where MmpG0
apflaw depth MbpG0 − 2 (a /t)G1
Qpflaw shape parameter using Eq. (3)
In the calculation of Q using Eq. (3), qy is calculated
2 Use of Eqs. (5) or (7) is only a recommendation for determination using Eq. (8):
of KI. For some complex geometries and stress distributions, this
approach may not be adequate. Other techniques may be used,
provided the methods and analyses are documented. qy p [(␴m Mm + Ap Mm + ␴b Mb) / ␴ys]2 / 6 (8)
406

APPENDIX A — NONMANDATORY Fig. A-4300-2
FIG. A-4300-2 REFERENCE FATIGUE CRACK GROWTH CURVES FOR CARBON AND LOW ALLOY FERRITIC
STEELS EXPOSED TO WATER ENVIRONMENTS
417

ARTICLE A-5000
ANALYSIS
A-5100 SCOPE (1) Calculate the incremental flaw growth ⌬a at

Point 1 in Fig. A-3300-1(b), by integration of Eq. (1)
This Article provides the method to be used in
of A-4300.
applying the analyses to the normal (including upset
(2) Determine the parameters A and B from the
and test), emergency, and faulted conditions.
ranges of membrane stress, ⌬␴m, and bending stress,
⌬␴b, obtained in accordance with A-3200(a) and Fig.
A-3200-1(b) as follows:
A p 0.92 + 0.03 Rb
A00 A-5200 END-OF-PERIOD FLAW SIZE B p 0.10 + 0.80Rb
where
In order to determine the maximum potential for Rb p ⌬␴b/(⌬␴m + ⌬␴b)
fatigue flaw growth of the observed flaw indication (3) Calculate the parameters e and f from the
during normal operation, a cumulative fatigue flaw initial flaw dimensions a0 and ᐉ0 for the increment, as
growth study of the component should be performed follows:
using appropriate fatigue crack growth rates given in e p (ᐉ0/2t)m − (At/a0 − B)−m
A-4300. The design transients prescribed in the system f p (a0/t)m − [A/(2t/ᐉ0+B)]m
Design Specification that apply to the remainder of the
evaluation period for the component should be included. where t is the component wall thickness and m p 2.8.
Cumulative fatigue crack growth analysis of components (4) Evaluate the flaw length ᐉ p ᐉ0 + ⌬ᐉ as
need not include emergency and faulted conditions. illustrated by Point 2 in Fig. A-3300-1(b), at the end
Stress intensity factors should be determined for each
of the increment, as a function of the flaw depth a p
transient using the bounding elliptical or semielliptical
a0 + ⌬a at the end of the increment, as follows:
flaw model described in A-2000 and consistent with
ᐉ p 2a[(A − Ba/t)−m + e (a/t)−m]1/m
the methods for KI determination outlined in A-3000.
if 2a0/ᐉ0≤ (A − Ba0/t)
The plastic zone correction need not be taken into
ᐉ p 2a/{A [1 − F (a/t)−m]−1/m − Ba/t}
account in calculating KI. KI can be determined by
setting the plastic zone correction factor qy p 0 in A- if 2a0/ᐉ0 > (A − Ba0/t)
3000. Each transient should be considered in approxi-
mate chronological order in the following manner. (b) Generalized Stress Approach
(1) Determine the range of KI fluctuation associated (1) Calculate the incremental flaw growth, ⌬a, at
with the transient, ⌬KI. Point 1 in Fig. A-3300-1(b), by integration of Eq. (1)
(2) Find the incremental flaw growth ⌬a and ⌬ᐉ of A-4300.
corresponding to ⌬KI from the fatigue flaw growth (2) Calculate the incremental flaw growth, ⌬ᐉ, at
rate data. Point 2 in Fig. A-3300-1(b), by integration of the
(3) Update the flaw dimensions a and ᐉ. following equation:
(4) Repeat these calculations for the next transient dᐉ/dN p 2 C0(⌬KI)a
using the updated flaw dimensions.
For surface flaws, either of the following two methods where n and C0 are as defined in A-4300.
is acceptable for determining ⌬a and ⌬ for the increment The above procedure, after all transients have been
of time in the calculation. considered, yields the expected end-of-period flaw size
(a) Linearized Stress Ratio Approach af and ᐉf.
418

A-5300 APPENDIX A — NONMANDATORY A-5400
A-5300 NORMAL CONDITIONS (4) Compare the calculated stress intensity factors
to the material fracture toughness KIa for the appropriate
(a) Normal conditions include all transients expected
temperature to determine the critical flaw size ac corres-
to occur during the course of system testing and opera-
ponding to KI p KIa for the transient.
tion, as well as upset conditions anticipated to occur
(5) Proceed to the next transient.
frequently enough that the system should be designed
(c) The smallest value of ac determined by the above
to accommodate them.
procedure, after all transients have been considered,
(b) The minimum critical flaw size for normal condi-
represents the minimum critical flaw size for normal
tions ac should be established. The procedure for de-
termining critical flaw size for each transient is as conditions at the location of the observed flaw.
follows.
(1) Determine the maximum end-of-period irradia-
tion level at the flaw location.
(2) Using irradiated fracture toughness data, deter- A-5400 EMERGENCY AND FAULTED
mine the crack arrest fracture toughness KIa as a function CONDITIONS
of temperature.
(3) Calculate stress intensity factors (using the (a) Emergency and faulted conditions refer to very
methods outlined in A-3000 or some other documented low probability postulated incidents whose conse-
procedure) for various penetration depths of an assumed quences are such that subsequent plant operation is
flaw, geometrically similar to the ellipse or semiellipse not required and safe system shutdown is the only
defined by the shape af / ᐉf . consideration.
418.1

ARTICLE G-1000 A99
INTRODUCTION
This Appendix presents a procedure for obtaining

the allowable loadings for ferritic pressure retaining
materials in components. This procedure is based on
the principles of linear elastic fracture mechanics. At
each location being investigated a maximum postulated
flaw is assumed. At the same location the mode I stress
intensity factor1 KI is produced by each of the specified
loadings as calculated and the summation of the KI
values is compared to a reference value KIc which is
the highest critical value of KI that can be ensured
for the material and temperature involved. Different
procedures are recommended for different components
and operating conditions.
1 The stress intensity factor as used in fracture mechanics has no

relation to and must not be confused with the stress intensity used
in Section III, Division 1. Furthermore, stresses referred to in this
Appendix are calculated normal tensile stresses not stress intensities
in a defect free stress model at the surface nearest the location of
the assumed defect.
461

ARTICLE G-2000
VESSELS
G-2100 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS the material. This information shall be documented by

the Owner.
A99 G-2110 REFERENCE CRITICAL STRESS
A00 INTENSITY FACTOR
(a) Figure G-2210-1 is a curve showing the relation- G-2120 MAXIMUM POSTULATED DEFECT 98
ship that can be conservatively expected between the The postulated defects used in this recommended
critical, or reference, stress intensity factor KIc, ksi procedure are sharp, surface defects oriented axially
√ in., and a temperature which is related to the for plates, forgings, and axial welds, and circumferen-
reference nil-ductility temperature RTNDT determined in tially for circumferential welds. For section thicknesses
NB-2331. This curve is based on the lower bound of of 4 in. to 12 in. (102 mm to 305 mm), the postulated
static critical KI values measured as a function of defects have a depth of one-fourth of the section
temperature on specimens of SA-533 Grade B Class thickness and a length of 11⁄2 times the section thickness.
1, and SA-508-1, SA-508-2, and SA-508-3 steel. No Defects are postulated at both the inside and outside
available data points for static tests fall below the surfaces. For sections greater than 12 in. (305 mm)
curve. An analytical approximation to the curve is: thick, the postulated defect for the 12 in. section is
used. For sections less than 4 in. (102 mm) thick, the
KIc p 33.2 + 20.734 exp [0.02(T − RTNDT)] 1 in. (25 mm) deep defect is conservatively postulated.
Smaller defect sizes1 may be used on an individual
case basis if a smaller size of maximum postulated
Unless higher KIc values can be justified for the particu- defect can be ensured. Due to the safety factors recom-
lar material and circumstances being considered, Fig. mended here, the prevention of nonductile fracture is
G-2210-1 may be used for ferritic steels which meet ensured for some of the most important situations even
the requirements of NB-2331 and which have a specified if the defects were to be about twice as large in linear
minimum yield strength at room temperature of 50.0 dimensions as this postulated maximum defect.
ksi or less.
(b) For materials which have specified minimum
yield strengths at room temperature greater than 50.0 G-2200 LEVEL A AND LEVEL B
ksi but not exceeding 90.0 ksi, Fig. G-2210-1 may be SERVICE LIMITS
used provided fracture mechanics data are obtained on
at least three heats of the material on a sufficient G-2210 SHELLS AND HEADS REMOTE
number of specimens to cover the temperature range FROM DISCONTINUITIES
of interest, including the weld metal and heat-affected G-2211 Recommendations
zone, and provided that the data are equal to or
above the curve of Fig. G-2210-1. These data shall be The assumptions of this Subarticle are recommended
documented by the Owner. Where these materials of for shell and head regions during Level A and B
higher yield strengths (specified minimum yield strength Service Limits.
greater than 50.0 ksi (345 MPa) but not exceeding
1 WRCB 175 (Welding Research Council Bulletin 175) “PVRC
90.0 ksi (620 MPa) are to be used in conditions where
Recommendations on Toughness Requirements for Ferritic Materials”
radiation may affect the material properties, the effect provides procedures in Paragraph 5(c)(2) for considering maximum
of radiation on the KIc curve shall be determined for postulated defects smaller than those described.
462

G-2212 APPENDIX G — NONMANDATORY G-2214.2
FIG. G-2210-1 A99
G-2212 Material Fracture Toughness Mm p 3.21 for √ t > 3.464

A99 G-2212.1 Reference Critical Stress Intensity Factor Similarly, Mm for an outside axial surface flaw is
for Material. The KIc values of Fig. G-2210-1 are given by
recommended. Mm p 1.77 for √ t < 2
Mm p 0.893 √ t for 2 ≤ √ t ≤ 3.464
G-2212.2 Irradiation Effects. Subarticle A-4400 of
Mm p 3.09 for √ t > 3.464
Appendix A is recommended to define the change in
reference critical stress intensity factor due to irradiation. where
p p internal pressure (ksi)
Ri p vessel inner radius (in.)
98 G-2213 Maximum Postulated Defects t p vessel wall thickness (in.)
The KI corresponding to membrane tension for the
The recommended maximum postulated defects are postulated circumferential defect of G-2120 is KIM Mm
described in G-2120. × (pRi /t), where Mm, for an inside or an outside
circumferential surface defect is given by
Mm p 0.89 for √ t < 2
G-2214 Calculated Stress Intensity Factors Mm p 0.443 √ t for 2 ≤ √ t ≤ 3.464
Mm p 1.53 for √ t > 3.464
98 G-2214.1 Membrane Tension. The KI correspond-
ing to membrane tension for the postulated axial defect
of G-2120 is KIm p Mm × (pRi /t), where Mm for an
inside axial surface flaw is given by G-2214.2 Bending Stress. The KI corresponding to 98
Mm p 1.85 for √ t < 2 bending stress for postulated axial or circumferential
Mm p 0.926 √ t for 2 ≤ √ t ≤ 3.464 defect of G-2120 is KIb p Mb × maximum bending
463

G-2214.2 1998 SECTION XI, DIVISION 1 G-2215
stress, where Mb is two-thirds of Mm for the axial 1⁄

4-thickness outside surface defect, and (3) the calcu-
defect. lated results for the maximum allowable heatup rate
using a 1⁄4-thickness outside surface defect.
98 G-2214.3 Radial Thermal Gradient. The maximum
KI produced by a radial thermal gradient for a postulated
axial or circumferential inside surface defect of G-2120 G-2215 Allowable Pressure 98
is KIt p 0.953 × 10−3 × CR × t 2.5, where CR is the A99
The equations given in this Subarticle provide the A00
cooldown rate in F/hr., or, for a postulated axial or
basis for determination of the allowable pressure at
circumferential outside surface defect, KIt p 0.753 ×
any temperature at the depth of the postulated defect
10−3 × HU × t2.5, where HU is the heatup rate in F/hr.
during Service Conditions for which Level A and Level
The through-wall temperature difference associated
B Service Limits are specified. In addition to the
with the maximum thermal KI can be determined from
conservatism of these assumptions, it is recommended
Fig. G-2214-1. The temperature at any radial distance
that a factor of 2 be applied to the calculated KI values
from the vessel surface can be determined from Fig.
produced by primary stresses. In shell and head regions
G-2214-2 for the maximum thermal KI.
remote from discontinuities, the only significant loadings
(a) The maximum thermal KI and the temperature
are: (1) general primary membrane stress due to pres-
relationship in Fig. G-2214-1 are applicable only for
sure; and (2) thermal stress due to thermal gradient
the conditions in G-2214.3(a)(1) and (2).
through the thickness during startup and shutdown.
(1) An assumed shape of the temperature gradient
Therefore, the requirement to be satisfied and from
is approximately as shown in Fig. G-2214-2.
which the allowable pressure for any assumed rate of
(2) The temperature change starts from a steady
temperature change can be determined is:
state condition and has a rate, associated with startup
and shutdown, less than about 100°F /hr (56°C/hr. The
results would be overly conservative if applied to rapid 2KIm + KIt < KIc (1)
temperature changes.
(b) Alternatively, the KI for radial thermal gradient throughout the life of the component at each temperature
can be calculated for any thermal stress distribution at with KIm from G-2214.1, KIt from G-2214.3, and KIc
any specified time during cooldown for a 1⁄4-thickness from Fig. G-2210-1.
axial or circumferential surface defect. The allowable pressure at any temperature shall be
For an inside surface defect during cooldown determined as follows.
(a) For the startup condition,
KIt p (1.0359C0 + 0.6322C1 + 0.4753C2 + 0.3855C3) √ ␲a (1) consider postulated defects in accordance with
G-2120;
(2) perform calculations for thermal stress intensity
For an outside surface defect during heatup factors due to the specified range of heat-up rates from
G-2214.3;
KIt p (1.043C0 + 0.630C1 + 0.481C2 + (0.401C3) √ ␲a (3) calculate the KIa toughness for all vessel belt-
line materials from G-2212 using temperatures and
RTNDT values for the corresponding locations of inter-
The coefficients C0, C1, C2, and C3 are determined est; and
from the thermal stress distribution at any specified (4) calculate the pressure as a function of coolant
time during the heatup or cooldown using inlet temperature for each material and location. The
allowable pressure-temperature relationship is the mini-
␴ (x) p C0 + C1 (x/a) + C2 (x/a)2 + C3 (x/a)3 mum pressure at any temperature determined from
(a) the calculated steady-state (KIt p 0) results
for the 1⁄4-thickness inside surface postulated defects
where x is a dummy variable that representsthe radial
using the equation
distance, in., from the appropriate (i.e., inside or outside)
冢冣
surface and a is the maximum crack depth, in.
KIa t⁄
(c) For the startup condition, the allowable pressure Pp Ri
2Mm
vs. temperature relationship is the minimum pressure
at any temperature, determined from (1) the calculated
steady state results for the 1⁄4-thickness inside surface (b) the calculated results from all vessel beltline
defect, (2) the calculated steady state results for the materials for the heatup stress intensity factors using the
464

APPENDIX G — NONMANDATORY Fig. G-2214-1
FIG. G-2214-1
465

G-2215 1998 SECTION XI, DIVISION 1 G-2215
FIG. G-2214-2
corresponding 1⁄4-thickness outside-surface postulated

defects and the equation
Pp
KIa - KIt
2Mm 冢⁄ 冣
t
Ri
The allowable pressure-temperature relationship is
冢⁄ 冣
KIa - KIt t the minimum pressure at any temperature, determined
Pp Ri from all vessel beltline materials for the cooldown
2Mm
stress intensity factors using the corresponding 1⁄4-
thickness inside-surface postulated defects.
Those plants having low temperature overpressure
protection (LTOP) systems can use the following load
(b) For the cooldown condition, and temperature conditions to provide protection against
(1) consider postulated defects in accordance with failure during reactor start-up and shutdown operation
G-2120; due to low temperature overpressure events that have
(2) perform calculations for thermal stress intensity been classified as Service Level A or B events. LTOP
factors due to the specified range of cooldown rates systems shall be effective at coolant temperatures less
from G-2214.3; than 200°F or at coolant temperatures corresponding
(3) calculate the KIa toughness for all vessel belt- to a reactor vessel metal temperature less than RTNDT
line materials from G-2212 using temperatures and + 50°F, whichever is greater.2,3 LTOP systems shall
RTNDT values for the corresponding location of inter-
est; and 2 The coolant temperature is the reactor coolant inlet temperature.
(4) calculate the pressure as a function of coolant 3 The vessel metal temperature is the temperature at a distance one
inlet temperature for each material and location using fourth of the vessel section thickness from the inside wetted surface
the equation. in the vessel beltline region. RTNDT is the highest adjusted reference
466

G-2215 APPENDIX G — NONMANDATORY G-2400
limit the maximum pressure in the vessel to 100% of G-2223 Toughness Requirements for Nozzles
the pressure determined to satisfy Eq. (1).
(a) A quantitative evaluation of the fracture toughness
requirements for nozzles is not feasible at this time,
but preliminary data indicate that the design defect size
for nozzles, considering the combined effects of internal
G-2220 NOZZLES, FLANGES, AND SHELL pressure, external loading and thermal stresses, may
REGIONS NEAR GEOMETRIC be a fraction of that postulated for the vessel shell.
DISCONTINUITIES Nondestructive examination methods shall be suffi-
G-2221 General Requirements ciently reliable and sensitive to detect these smaller
defects.
The same general procedure as was used for the (b) WRCB 175 provides an approximate method in
shell and head regions in G-2210 may be used for Paragraph 5C(2) for analyzing the inside corner of a
areas where more complicated stress distributions occur, nozzle and cylindrical shell for elastic stresses due to
but certain modifications of the procedures for determin- internal pressure stress.
ing allowable applied loads shall be followed in order (c) Fracture toughness analysis to demonstrate protec-
to meet special situations, as stipulated in G-2222 and tion against nonductile failure is not required for portions
G-2223. of nozzles and appurtenances having a thickness of 2.5
in. or less, provided the lowest service temperature is
not lower than RTNDT plus 60°F (+33°C).
G-2222 Consideration of Membrane and
Bending Stresses
(a) Equation (1) of G-2215 requires modification to
include the bending stresses which may be important
contributors to the calculated KI value at a point near G-2300 LEVEL C AND LEVEL D
a flange or nozzle. The terms whose sum must be SERVICE LIMITS
<KIa for normal and upset operating conditions are: G-2310 RECOMMENDATIONS
(1) 2KIm from G-2214.1 for primary membrane
stress; The possible combinations of loadings, defect sizes,
(2) 2KIb from G-2214.2 for primary bending stress; and material properties which may be encountered
(3) KIm from G-2214.1 for secondary membrane during Level C and Level D Service Limits are too
stress; diverse to allow the application of definitive rules, and
(4) KIb from G-2214.2 for secondary bending it is recommended that each situation be studied on
stress. an individual case basis. The principles given in this
(b) For purposes of this evaluation, stresses which Appendix may be applied, where applicable, with any
result from bolt preloading shall be considered as postulated loadings, defect sizes, and material toughness
primary. which can be justified for the situation involved.
(c) It is recommended that when the flange and
adjacent shell region are stressed by the full intended
bolt preload and by pressure not exceeding 20% of
the preoperational system hydrostatic test pressure, mini-
mum metal temperature in the stressed region should G-2400 HYDROSTATIC TEST A99
be at least the initial RTNDT temperature for the material TEMPERATURE
in the stressed regions plus any effects of irradiation
at the stressed regions. (a) For system and component hydrostatic tests per-
(d) Thermal stresses shall be considered as secondary formed prior to loading fuel in the reactor vessel, it
except as provided in NB-3213.13(b). The KI of G- is recommended that hydrostatic tests be performed at
2214.3(b) is recommended for the evaluation of thermal a temperature not lower than RTNDT plus 60°F. The
stress. 60°F margin is intended to provide protection against
nonductile failure at the test pressure.
(b) For system and component hydrostatic tests per-
temperature (for weld or base metal in the beltline region) at a
distance one fourth of the vessel section thickness from the vessel formed subsequent to loading fuel in the reactor vessel,
wetted inner surface as determined by Regulatory Guide 1.99, Rev. 2. the minimum test temperature should be determined
467

G-2400 1998 SECTION XI, DIVISION 1 G-2400
by evaluating KI. The terms given in (1) through (4)

below should be summed in determining KI :
(1) 1.5KIm from G-2214.1 for primary membrane
stress;
(2) 1.5KIb from G-2214.2 for primary bending
stress;
(3) KIm from G-2214.1 for secondary membrane
stress;
(4) KIb from G-2214.2 for secondary bending
stress.
KI, calculated by summing the four values given in
(1) through (4) above, shall not exceed the applicable
KIc value.
(c) The system hydrostatic test to satisfy G-2400(a)
or (b) should be performed at a temperature not lower
than the highest required temperature for any component
in the system.
468

ARTICLE J-1000 A00
SCOPE
(a) This Appendix provides assistance to determine

the applicability of IWA-4000. For the purpose of this
Appendix, repair /replacement activities are considered
separate from maintenance activities.
(b) Fig. J-1000-1 shall be used to distinguish between
repair /replacement activities and maintenance activities.
Maintenance activities may be categorized as activities
requiring subsequent tests or examinations or as activi-
ties for which Section XI is not applicable.
(c) Fig. J-1000-1 shall be used to determine the
applicability of the following provisions.
499

Fig. J-1000-1 1998 SECTION XI, DIVISION 1
DOES ACTIVITY AFFECT

AN ITEM OR ITS
YES SUPPORT WITHIN THE NO
CLASSIFICATION AND
BOUNDARIES OF
JURISDICTION,
IWA-1320?
DOES ACTIVITY
AFFECT AN EXCLUDED ITEMS IN THIS
ITEM IDENTIFIED IN CATEGORY ARE NOT
IWA-4120? WITHIN THE SCOPE OF
SECTION XI
(ARTICLE J-4000)
NO
DOES ACTIVITY
AFFECT THE PRESSURE
RETAINING PORTION
OF AN ITEM*;
OR ATTACHMENT TO
AN ITEM* OR ITS
SUPPORT?
YES
DOES ACTIVITY ITEMS AND

REQUIRE DESIGN ACTIVITIES IN THIS
CHANGE OR YES CATEGORY ARE
INSTALLATION OF AN INCLUDED IN
ATTACHMENT OR REPAIR/REPLACEMENT
PRESSURE RETAINING ACTIVITIES
ITEM* OR ITS SUPPORT (ARTICLE J-2000)
OR SUPPORT ITEM,
OR
WELDING/BRAZING ON
NO PRESSURE RETAINING
PORTION OF
ATTACHMENT/ITEM* OR
ITS SUPPORT?
NO YES
IS MATERIAL REQUIRED
TO BE REMOVED FROM DOES MATERIAL
PRESSURE RETAINING REMOVAL ACTIVITY
ATTACHMENT/ITEM*, ITS YES INVOLVE DEFECT
SUPPORTS OR REMOVAL OR
ATTACHMENT WELDS TO ENCROACHMENT ON
PRESSURE RETAINING REQUIRED WALL
ITEMS* BY MECHANICAL OR THICKNESS?
THERMAL PROCESSES?
NO
NO
DOES THE ACTIVITY
AFFECT A SECTION XI
REQUIRED TEST OR
EXAMINATION RESULT
YES RECORDED FOR THE
ITEM ON WHICH THE
PROPOSED ACTIVITY YES
IS TO BE PERFORMED?
ACTIVITIES IN THIS ACTIVITIES IN THIS

CATEGORY ARE NOT WITHIN CATEGORY ARE CONSIDERED
THE SCOPE OF SECTION MAINTENANCE. BUT SINCE
NO
XI EVEN THOUGH THE ITEM THE PROPOSED ACTIVITY
ON WHICH THE ACTIVITY IS AFFECTS A REQUIRED TEST OR
PERFORMED IS WITHIN THE EXAMINATION RECORD, NEW
SECTION XI BOUNDARY TESTS OR EXAMINATIONS ARE
[PARAGRAPH J-4000 (b)]. REQUIRED (ARTICLE J-3000).
* ALSO INCLUDES THOSE NONSTRUCTURAL PUMP AND VALVE INTERNALS CONSTRUCTED TO

CONSTRUCTION CODES OR CODE CASES AND WHICH ARE WITHIN THE SECTION XI BOUNDARY.
FIG. J-1000-1 DECISION TREE
500

ARTICLE J-2000
(a) Repair /replacement activities shall comply with

the requirements of IWA-4000 and shall be in accord-
ance with the Repair /Replacement Program.
(b) The following are some examples of repair /
replacement activities when performed on items within
the Section XI scope:
(1) removing weld or material defects;
(2) reducing the size of defects to a size acceptable
to the applicable flaw evaluation criteria;
(3) performing welding or brazing;
(4) adding items;
(5) system changes, such as rerouting of piping;
(6) modifying items;
(7) rerating.
501

A00 ARTICLE J-3000
MAINTENANCE REQUIRING SUBSEQUENT
TEST OR EXAMINATION
(a) Maintenance activities within this category are (1) grinding or machining on valve disk seating
not within the scope of Section XI but are performed and surfaces;
controlled in accordance with the Owner’s procedures. (2) removing arc strikes or weld spatter, in the
However, due to the nature of the work or item involved, area of previous PSI /ISI surface examinations; and
tests or examinations are required to be performed (3) preparing welds for NDE.
subsequent to completion of the maintenance work (d) The following are some examples of maintenance
activity. activities that may require subsequent testing as required
by the ASME Code For Operation and Maintenance
(b) The maintenance activities within this category
of Nuclear Power Plants:
differ from the maintenance activities described in
(1) for valves, adjustment of packing, removal of
Article J-4000 in that these activities are performed on bonnet, stem assembly or activator, or disconnection
items within the Section XI boundary and these activities of hydraulic or electrical lines;
affect the existing inspection, test, or examination record (2) for pumps, adjusting packing, adding packing
required by this Division or other ASME codes. rings, mechanical seal maintenance, or replacement or
(c) The following are some examples of maintenance cleaning of the rotating element; and
activities that may require subsequent Section XI test (3) adjustment of pressure relief device set points
or examination: in accordance with existing design requirements.
502

ARTICLE K-1000
INTRODUCTION
K-1100 SCOPE dures for Level C and D Service Loadings are provided
in K-5000.
This Appendix provides acceptance criteria and evalu-
ation procedures for determining acceptability for opera-
tion of a reactor vessel when the vessel metal tempera-
ture is in the upper shelf range. The methodology K-1300 GENERAL NOMENCLATURE A99
is based on the principles of elastic-plastic fracture A00
apflaw depth that includes ductile flaw
mechanics. Flaws shall be postulated in the reactor
extension (in.)
vessel at locations of predicted low upper shelf Charpy
aepeffective flaw depth that includes ductile
impact energy, and the applied J-integral for these flaws
flaw extension and a plastic-zone correc-
shall be calculated and compared with the J-integral
tion (in.)
fracture resistance of the material to determine accept-
ae*peffective flaw depth at onset of flaw
ability. All specified design transients for the reactor
instability, including ductile flaw exten-
vessel shall be considered.
sion and a plastic-zone correction (in.)
aoppostulated initial flaw depth (in.)
⌬ap amount of ductile flaw extension (in.)
⌬ a*pamount of ductile flaw extension at onset
of flaw instability (in.)
Aparea parameter for tensile stability evalu-
ation (in.2)
Acparea of the flaw (in.2)
C1, C2pmaterial constants used to describe the
power-law fit to the J-integral resistance
K-1200 PROCEDURE
curve for the material, JR p C1 (⌬a)C2
The following analytical procedure shall be used. Cmpmaterial coefficient for calculation of
(a) Reactor vessel flaws shall be postulated in accord- stress intensity factor due to radial ther-
ance with the criteria of K-2000. mal gradient [ksi-hour/(in.2-°F)]
(b) Loading conditions at the locations of the postu- (CR)pcooldown rate (°F /hr)
lated flaws shall be determined for Level A, B, C, and dpthermal diffusivity (in.2/hour)
D Service Loadings. EpYoung’s modulus (ksi)
(c) Material properties, including E, ␴y, and the J- E ′p E /(1-␯2) (ksi)
integral resistance curve (J-R curve), shall be determined F1, F2, F3pgeometry factors used to calculate the
at the locations of the postulated flaws. Requirements stress intensity factor (dimensionless)
for determining the J-R curve are provided in K-3300. F1*, F2*, F3*pgeometry factors used to calculate the
(d) The postulated flaws shall be evaluated in accord- stress intensity factor at onset of flaw
ance with the acceptance criteria of K-2000. Require- instability (dimensionless)
ments for evaluating the applied J-integral are provided JpJ-integral due to the applied loads (in.-
in K-3200, and for determining flaw stability in K-3400. lb /in.2)
Three permissible evaluation methods are described in JRpJ-integral fracture resistance for the mate-
K-3500. Detailed calculation procedures for Levels A rial (in.-lb /in.2)
and B Service Loadings are provided in K-4000. Proce- J0.1p J-integral fracture resistance for the mate-
507

K-1300 1998 SECTION XI, DIVISION 1 K-1300
rial at a ductile flaw extension of 0.10 Psppressure used to calculate the applied J-
in. (in.-lb /in.2) integral /tearing modulus line (ksi)
J1papplied J-integral at a flaw depth of ao P*pinternal pressure at onset of flaw instabil-
+ 0.10 in. (in.-lb /in.2) ity (ksi)
J *pJ-integral at onset of flaw instability (in.- PIpinternal pressure at tensile instability of
lb /in.2) the remaining ligament (ksi)
KIpmode I stress intensity factor Popreference limit-load internal pressure
(ksi √ in.) (ksi)
KIppmode I stress intensity factor due to Rip inner radius of the vessel (in.)
Rmp mean radius of the vessel (in.)
internal pressure, calculated with no plas-
Srpabscissa of the failure assessment dia-
tic-zone correction (ksi √ in.)
gram curve (dimensionless)
K′Ipp KIp calculated with a plastic-zone correc-
S r′p ratio of internal pressure to reference
tion (ksi √ in.) limit-load internal pressure (dimen-
K *IppKIp at onset of flaw instability, calculated sionless)
with a plastic-zone correction (SF)p safety factor (dimensionless)
(ksi √ in.) tp vessel wall thickness (in.)
KItpmode I stress intensity factor due to a Tp tearing modulus due to the applied loads
radial thermal gradient through the vessel (dimensionless)
wall, calculated with no plastic-zone cor- TRptearing modulus resistance for the mate-
rection (ksi √ in.) rial (dimensionless)
KIt′pKIt calculated with a plastic-zone correc- Wpparameter used to relate the applied J-
tion (ksi √ in.) integral to the applied tearing modulus
KIt*pKIt at onset of flaw instability, calculated (dimensionless)
with a plastic-zone correction (ksi ␣pcoefficient of thermal expansion (in./
in./°F)
√ in.)
Krp ordinate of the failure assessment dia- ␯pPoisson’s ratio (dimensionless)
␴fp reference flow stress, specified as 85
gram curve (dimensionless)
ksi (ksi)
Kr′p ratio of the stress intensity factor to
␴opflow stress for the material for the tensile
the fracture toughness for the material stability evaluation, including the effects
(dimensionless) of temperature and fluence (ksi)
ᐉ ptotal length of the flaw (in.) ␴upultimate tensile strength for the material,
ppinternal pressure (ksi) including the effects of temperature and
Papaccumulation pressure as defined in the fluence (ksi)
plant specific Overpressure Protection ␴ypyield strength for the material, including
Report, but not exceeding 1.1 times the the effects of temperature and fluence
design pressure (ksi) (ksi)
508

ARTICLE K-5000
EVALUATION PROCEDURES FOR LEVELS C AND D
SERVICE LOADINGS
K-5100 SCOPE K-5220 EVALUATION USING CRITERION

FOR FLAW EXTENSION OF 0.1 IN.
This Article contains evaluation procedures that may
be used to satisfy the acceptance criteria in K-2000 (a) For Level C Service Loadings, the J-integral due
for Level C and D Service Loadings. A procedure to to applied loads, J1, shall be calculated in accordance
satisfy the J-integral criteria for a specified amount of with K-5210. Flaw depth a, equal to ao + 0.1 in., shall
flaw extension of 0.1 in. (2.5 mm) is provided in K- be used to calculate the applied J- integral. Acceptance
5200. A procedure to satisfy the flaw stability criteria criteria for Level C Service Loadings based on a ductile
is provided in K-5300. These procedures are applicable flaw extension of 0.1 in. (2.5 mm) in K-2300(a)(1) are
to axial and circumferential flaw orientations, and shall satisfied when the following inequality is satisfied at
be used when this approach is selected. each value of J1 for the range in ao specified in K-2300.
J1 < J0.1
K-5200 EVALUATION PROCEDURE
FOR THE APPLIED (b) For time-dependent Level C Service Loadings,
J-INTEGRAL evaluation shall be in accordance with K-5400.
A99 K-5210 CALCULATION OF THE APPLIED
J-INTEGRAL
K-5300 EVALUATION PROCEDURE A00
(a) Stress intensity factors shall be calculated as a FOR FLAW STABILITY
function of flaw depth, a for Level C and D Service
Loadings for each applicable stress component, as fol- (a) For Level C and D Service Loadings, flaw stabil-
lows. Calculate KI due to internal pressure, radial ity shall be evaluated by direct application of the flaw
thermal gradient through the vessel wall, and cladding/ stability requirements of K-3400. The applied J-integral
base metal differential thermal expansion. for Level C and D Service Loadings shall be calculated
(b) The effective flaw depth for small-scale yielding, in accordance with K-5210 for a series of flaw depths
ae shall be calculated using corresponding to increasing amounts of ductile flaw
extension, ⌬a. A flaw depth a equal to a0 + ⌬a shall
be used to calculate the applied J-integral. The J-integral
ae p a + [1/(6␲)](KI /␴y)2 resistance at each value of ⌬a shall be determined from
the J-R curve. Flaw stability at a given applied load
(c) The stress intensity factor for small-scale yielding, is verified when K-3400(a) and K-3400(b) are satisfied.
KI′, shall be calculated by substituting ae for a in (a) Acceptance criteria based on flaw stability for Level
above. C Service Loadings in K-2300(a)(2), and for Level D
(d) The J-integral due to applied loads for small- Service Loadings in K-2400(a), are satisfied when flaw
scale yielding shall be calculated using stability is verified for the range in a0 specified in K-
2300 and K-2400.
(b) For Level D Service Loadings, for the range in
J p 1000(KI′)2 /E′ a0 specified in K-2400, demonstrate that the total flaw
519

K-5300 1998 SECTION XI, DIVISION 1 K-5400
depth after stable flaw extension is less than or equal

to 75% of the vessel wall thickness, and the remaining
ligament is not subject to tensile instability.
PI p 1.07␴o
冤 1 − (A c /A )
(R2i /(2R m t)) + (A c /A) 冥
The internal pressure p shall be less than PI, where
PI is the internal pressure at tensile instability of the where Rm is the mean radius of the vessel, ␴o is given
remaining ligament. Equations for PI are given in (1) in Eq. (8), A is given by Eq. (9), and Ac for a semi-
below for the axial flaw, and in (2) below for the elliptical flaw is given by Eq. (10). This equation for
circumferential flaw. PI includes the effect of pressure on the flaw face. This
(1) For the axial flaw, equation is valid for internal pressures not exceeding the
PI p 1.07␴o
冤1 − (Ac/A)
(Ri/t) + (Ac/A) 冥 pressure at tensile instability caused by the applied
hoop stress acting over the nominal wall thickness of
the vessel. This validity limit on pressure for the
where circumferential flaw equation for PI is
␴y + ␴u
␴o p (8) PI ≤ 1.07␴o
t
2 Ri
A p t(ᐉ + t) (9) (c) For time-dependent Level C and D Service Load-

ings, evaluation shall be in accordance with K-5400.
and ␱y is the yield strength for the material, ␱u is the
ultimate tensile strength for the material, ␱o is the flow
stress for the material for the tensile stability evaluation,
Rt is the inner radius of the vessel, t is the wall
thickness of the vessel, ᐉ is the total length of the
flaw, Ac is the area of the flaw, and A is an area K-5400 TIME-DEPENDENT LEVEL C
parameter. The material properties ␴y, ␴u, and ␴o include AND D SERVICE LOADINGS
the effects of temperature and fluence. This equation
for PI includes the effect of pressure on the flaw face. When the applicable stress components vary with
For a semi-elliptical flaw depth a, the relation for Ac time during Level C or D Service Loadings, evaluation
is given by shall be performed at various times during the postulated
loading to determine the limiting conditions for the
␲aᐉ flaw extension and flaw stability criteria. The J-integral
Ac p (10)
4 resistance shall be determined at each of the times the
evaluation is performed using the metal temperature
(2) For the circumferential flaw, associated with each flaw depth evaluated.
520

SEC11I1RVC 06-05-00 07:44:40 Job #38930 ASME Interpretations 46
This page (#2) is blank Blank Page This page (#2) is blank

Asme Secc Xi

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Asme Secc Xi

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

XI

ASME BOILER AND PRESSURE VESSEL CODE

ASME BOILER AND

ASME B&PVC SEC11$ADFM 05-15-00 13:30:36 pd: frontmatter Rev 15.04

No part of this document may be reproduced in any form,

The American Society of Mechanical Engineers

ASME B&PVC SEC11$ADFM 05-15-00 13:30:36 pd: frontmatter Rev 15.04

Page Location Change

v Contents Updated to reflect A00

ASME B&PVC SEC11$$COS 05-31-00 11:39:56 pd: soc Rev 15.04

42 IWA-4421 Subparagraphs (b) and (c) revised

ASME B&PVC SEC11$$COS 05-31-00 11:39:56 pd: soc Rev 15.04

IWE-1232 Subparagraph (c) added

ASME B&PVC SEC11$$COS 05-31-00 11:39:56 pd: soc Rev 15.04

A Detailed Contents Precedes Each Subsection and the Appendices

Division 1 Rules for Inspection and Testing of Components of Light-Water

Appendices Mandatory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Division 2 Rules for Inspection and Testing of Components of Gas-Cooled Plants

Division 3 Rules for Inspection and Testing of Components of

ASME B&PVC SEC11$$$FM 05-15-00 15:41:33 pd: frontmatter Rev 15.04

ASME B&PVC SEC11$$$FM 05-15-00 15:41:33 pd: frontmatter Rev 15.04

ASME B&PVC SEC11$$$FM 05-15-00 15:41:33 pd: frontmatter Rev 15.04

M. D. Bernstein, Chair C. F. Jeerings R. W. Mikitka, Chair M. Katcher

Subgroup on Ferrous Specifications (SC II)

Subgroup on General Requirements (SC I) J. T. Parsons, Chair M. H. Iken

Subgroup on Materials (SC I) D. W. Rahoi, Chair B. Heuer

Subgroup on Strength, Ferrous Alloys (SC II)

Subgroup on Strength of Weldments (SC II & SC IX)

ASME B&PVC SEC11$$$FM 05-15-00 15:41:33 pd: frontmatter Rev 15.04

C. J. Pieper, Chair D. H. Hanrath R. P. Deubler, Chair A. S. Laurenson

Working Group on Dynamic and Extreme Load Conditions

Working Group on Administration (SG-D) (SC III)

ASME B&PVC SEC11$$$FM 05-15-00 15:41:33 pd: frontmatter Rev 15.04

Subgroup on General Requirements (SC III & SC 3C)

Subgroup on Materials, Fabrication, and Examination (SC III)

Special Working Group on Editing and Review (SC III)

ASME B&PVC SEC11$$$FM 05-15-00 15:41:33 pd: frontmatter Rev 15.04

R. D. McGuire, Chair H. C. Graber

Subgroup on Volumetric Methods (SC V)

Working Group on Acoustic Emissions (SG-VM) (SC V)

ASME B&PVC SEC11$$$FM 05-15-00 15:41:33 pd: frontmatter Rev 15.04

G. B. Komora, Chair R. Mahadeen D. A. Bowers, Chair M. J. Houle

Special Working Group on High-Pressure Vessels (SC VIII)

ASME B&PVC SEC11$$$FM 05-15-00 15:41:33 pd: frontmatter Rev 15.04

S. H. Bush L. R. Katz C. G. McCargar, Chair R. Hundal

ASME B&PVC SEC11$$$FM 05-15-00 15:41:33 pd: frontmatter Rev 15.04

R. L. Dyle, Chair J. T. Lindberg F. E. Gregor, Chair H. W. Massie, Jr.

A. Selz, Chair T. P. Pastor

ASME B&PVC SEC11$$$FM 05-15-00 15:41:33 pd: frontmatter Rev 15.04

S. V. Voorhees, Chair D. J. Kreft T. P. Pastor, Secretary A. Kalnins

Subgroup on General Requirements (SC XII)

SUBCOMMITTEE ON BOILER AND

A. J. Spencer, Chair R. L. Williams W. J. O’Donnell, Chair G. Kharshafdjian

T. E. Quaka, Chair A. J. Spencer

ASME B&PVC SEC11$$$FM 05-15-00 15:41:33 pd: frontmatter Rev 15.04

R. G. Friend, Chair S. R. Irvin, Sr. S. F. Harrison, Jr., Chair D. M. Papa

Subgroup on General Requirements (SC-SVR)

M. D. Bernstein, Chair D. K. Peetz

ASME B&PVC SEC11$$$FM 05-15-00 15:41:33 pd: frontmatter Rev 15.04

INTRODUCTION These responsibilities include:

ASME B&PVC SEC11$$$FM 05-15-00 15:41:33 pd: frontmatter Rev 15.04

1. DIVISIONS IGG Reactor Internals

Division 3 consists of Subsections covering the fol-

Article Number Title